Bosch Appliances Home Security System ICP CC404 User Manual

ICP-CC404  
Installation Guide  
ICP-CC404  
EN Control Panel  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | Contents  
5.0  
5.1  
Remote Radio Transmitter Operations....24  
Indications from Remote Radio Transmitter  
Operations ........................................................24  
Remote Radio User Code Priority Levels.....24  
Changing or Deleting Remote Radio User  
Codes.................................................................24  
Two-Channel Remote Radio Hand-Held  
Transmitter Operations...................................25  
Arming in AWAY Mode ................................25  
Disarming from AWAY Mode.......................25  
Arming in STAY Mode 1 ...............................25  
Disarming from STAY Mode 1......................26  
Panic Alarm......................................................26  
Contents  
1.0  
Introduction ......................................................7  
1.1  
1.2  
1.2.1  
1.2.2  
1.2.3  
2.0  
2.1  
2.2  
2.3  
2.4  
Features ...............................................................7  
Quick Start..........................................................7  
Setting the Date and Time ................................8  
Zone Defaults......................................................8  
Zone Types .........................................................8  
Programming....................................................9  
Programming with the Remote Codepad........9  
Programming with the Programming Key ....10  
Programming Option Bits ...............................10  
Installer’s Programming Commands..............10  
5.2  
5.3  
5.4  
5.4.1  
5.4.2  
5.4.3  
5.4.4  
5.4.5  
5.5  
Four-Channel Remote Radio Hand-Held  
Transmitter Operations...................................26  
2.4.1  
Command 958 – Enable/Disable Zone Status  
Mode..................................................................11  
5.5.1  
5.5.2  
5.5.3  
5.5.4  
5.5.5  
5.5.6  
6.0  
Arming in AWAY Mode ................................26  
Disarming from AWAY Mode.......................26  
Arming in STAY Mode 1 ...............................26  
Disarming from STAY Mode 1......................26  
Panic Alarm......................................................27  
Remote Outputs...............................................27  
System Functions ...........................................27  
Installer Code Functions .................................27  
Set the Number of Days until the First Test  
Report ...............................................................27  
Changing Domestic Phone Numbers ............28  
Change Telco Arming or Disarming  
Sequence...........................................................28  
2.4.2  
2.4.3  
Command 959 – Test the Programming Key11  
Command 960 – Exit from the Installer's  
Programming Mode.........................................12  
Command 961 – Reset the Control Panel to  
Factory Default Settings...................................12  
Command 962 – Copy the Control Panel  
Memory to the Programming Key.................12  
Command 963 – Copy the Programming  
Key to the Control Panel.................................12  
Command 964 – Erase the Programming  
Key.....................................................................13  
Command 965 – Set Up Domestic Dialing  
Format ...............................................................13  
Command 966 – Enable or Disable Auto  
Step Mode.........................................................13  
2.4.4  
2.4.5  
2.4.6  
2.4.7  
2.4.8  
2.4.9  
6.1  
6.1.1  
6.1.2  
6.1.3  
6.1.4  
6.1.5  
6.1.6  
Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones..........................30  
Satellite Siren Service Mode...........................30  
Turning Telephone Monitor Mode On and  
Off......................................................................31  
2.4.10 Command 999 – Display the Panel Type or  
Software Version Number...............................14  
2.5  
3.0  
3.1  
3.2  
4.0  
4.1  
4.2  
4.3  
4.4  
4.5  
4.6  
4.7  
4.8  
4.9  
4.10  
4.11  
Disable Factory Defaults..................................15  
Codepad Indicators.......................................16  
ICP-CP508W Eight Zone LED Codepad......16  
ICP-CP508LW Eight Zone LCD Codepad...17  
System Operations.........................................18  
Arming the System in AWAY Mode.............18  
Disarming the System from AWAY Mode...18  
Arming the System in STAY Mode 1............19  
Disarming the System from STAY Mode 1..19  
Arming the System in STAY Mode 2............20  
Disarming the System from STAY Mode 2..20  
Codepad Duress Alarm...................................21  
Codepad Panic Alarm .....................................21  
Codepad Fire Alarm........................................21  
Codepad Medical Alarm.................................21  
Isolating Zones..................................................21  
6.1.7  
6.1.8  
6.2  
6.2.1  
6.2.2  
Walk Test Mode...............................................31  
Event Memory Recall Mode ..........................31  
Master Code Functions ...................................31  
Changing and Deleting User Codes ..............32  
Changing and Deleting Remote Radio User  
Codes.................................................................32  
Changing Domestic Phone Numbers ............33  
Change Telco Arming or Disarming  
Sequence...........................................................34  
Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones..........................35  
Turning Outputs On/Off ................................36  
Setting the Date and Time..............................36  
Walk Test Mode...............................................36  
Event Memory Recall Mode ..........................36  
Hold-Down Functions .....................................37  
Arming the System in AWAY Mode ............37  
Arming the System in STAY Mode 1 ...........37  
Arming the System in STAY Mode 2 ...........37  
Horn Speaker Test...........................................37  
6.2.3  
6.2.4  
6.2.5  
6.2.6  
6.2.7  
6.2.8  
6.2.9  
6.3  
6.3.1  
6.3.2  
6.3.3  
6.3.4  
4.11.1 Standard Isolating.............................................21  
4.11.2 Code to Isolate .................................................22  
4.12  
4.13  
Fault Analysis Mode ........................................22  
Fault Descriptions.............................................22  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | Contents  
6.3.5  
6.3.6  
6.3.7  
6.3.8  
6.3.9  
Bell Test.............................................................37 13.2  
Strobe Test........................................................37 13.3  
Turning Day Alarm On and Off ....................38 14.0  
Fault Analysis Mode ........................................38 14.1  
User Codes .......................................................51  
User Code Priority...........................................52  
Zone Information...........................................53  
Day Alarm Information...................................53  
Initiate a Modem Call......................................38 14.1.1 Day Alarm Resetting .......................................53  
6.3.10 Reset Latching Outputs ...................................38 14.1.2 Day Alarm Latching........................................53  
6.3.11 Codepad Buzzer Tone Change.......................38 14.1.3 Day Alarm Operation .....................................53  
6.3.12 Send Test Report..............................................38 14.2  
EOL Resistor Value.........................................53  
Zone Programming..........................................54  
7.0  
Remote Arming by Telephone...................38 14.3  
8.0  
8.1  
8.1.1  
8.1.2  
Alarm Link Software.....................................39 14.3.1 Zone Types.......................................................55  
Remote Connect...............................................39 14.3.2 Zone Pulse Count.............................................56  
Remote Connect with Customer Control......39 14.3.3 Zone Pulse Count Time ..................................56  
Remote Connect without Callback  
Verification .......................................................39  
14.3.4 Zone Options 1 ................................................57  
14.3.5 Keyswitch Zone Options.................................57  
14.3.6 Zone Options 2 ................................................58  
14.3.7 Zone Report Code...........................................59  
14.3.8 Zone Dialer Options........................................59  
8.1.3  
8.1.4  
8.2  
9.0  
9.1  
Remote Connect with Callback Verification 39  
Direct Connect .................................................40  
Alarm Link Options.........................................40  
Domestic Dialing ...........................................40  
Domestic Dialing Function..............................40  
Setting Up and Programming Domestic  
Reporting ..........................................................41  
Dialer Reporting Formats............................42  
Transmission Formats......................................42  
14.4  
14.5  
15.0  
15.1  
15.2  
15.3  
15.4  
15.5  
15.6  
15.7  
15.8  
15.9  
Swinger Shutdown Count for Siren ...............59  
Swinger Shutdown Count for Dialer .............59  
System Reporting Information...................60  
Zone Status – Bypass Reports.........................60  
Zone Status – Trouble Reports.......................60  
Zone Status – Sensor Watch Reports.............60  
Zone Status – Alarm Restore Code ...............60  
Zone Status Reporting Options......................61  
Open/Close Reports........................................61  
Open/Close Reporting Options.....................61  
Codepad Duress Report..................................61  
Codepad Panic Report....................................61  
9.2  
10.0  
10.1  
10.1.1 Contact ID Format...........................................42  
10.1.2 Point ID Codes.................................................43  
10.1.3 4 + 2 Express Reporting Format....................43  
10.1.4 Basic Pager Reporting Format........................44  
10.2  
11.0  
11.1  
Basic Pager Display Information....................45  
Dialer Information.........................................46  
Primary Telephone Number for Receiver 1  
and Receiver 2..................................................46  
Secondary Telephone Number for Receiver 1  
and Receiver 2..................................................47  
Handshake Tone for Receiver 1 and  
Receiver 2 .........................................................47  
Transmission Format for Receiver 1 and  
Receiver 2 .........................................................47  
15.10 Codepad Fire Report.......................................61  
15.11 Codepad Medical Report................................62  
15.12 Codepad Reporting Options ..........................62  
15.13 System Status – AUX Power Supply Fail  
Report ...............................................................62  
11.2  
11.3  
11.4  
11.5  
15.14 System Status – AUX Power Supply Fail  
Restore Report .................................................62  
15.15 System Status – AC Fail Report.....................62  
15.16 System Status – AC Fail Restore Report.......62  
15.17 System Status – Low Battery Report .............62  
15.18 System Status – Low Battery Restore Report63  
15.19 System Status – Access Denied ......................63  
15.20 System Status Reporting Options...................63  
15.21 Test Reporting Time........................................63  
15.22 Test Reporting Dialer Options.......................64  
Subscriber ID Number for Receiver 1 and  
Receiver 2 .........................................................47  
Dialing Format..................................................48  
Telco Arming Sequence ..................................48  
Telco Disarming Sequence..............................48  
Call Back Telephone Number........................49  
11.6  
11.7  
11.8  
11.9  
11.10 Ring Count........................................................49  
11.11 Telephone Line Fault Options........................49  
16.0  
16.1  
16.2  
16.3  
16.4  
16.5  
Programmable Outputs................................64  
Redirecting Outputs to the Codepad Buzzer 64  
Output Event Types ........................................65  
Output Polarity.................................................68  
Output Timing .................................................70  
Pulsing Polarities..............................................70  
12.0  
12.1  
12.2  
12.3  
13.0  
13.1  
Dialer Options................................................50  
Dialer Options 1...............................................50  
Dialer Options 2...............................................50  
Dialer Options 3...............................................51  
Access Code ....................................................51  
Installer Code ...................................................51  
4
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | Contents  
16.6  
17.0  
17.1  
17.2  
17.3  
17.4  
17.5  
17.6  
17.7  
17.8  
17.9  
One-Shot Polarities ..........................................70  
System Event Timers.....................................70  
Programming Entry/Exit Timers....................70  
Entry Timer 1...................................................70  
Entry Timer 2...................................................71  
Exit Time ..........................................................71  
Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode.............71  
Delay Alarm Reporting Time.........................71  
Sensor Watch Time..........................................71  
Codepad Lockout Time...................................71  
Siren Run Time................................................71  
Figures  
Figure 1:  
Figure 2:  
ICP-CP508W Eight Zone LED Codepad16  
ICP-CP508LW Eight Zone LCD  
Codepad.....................................................17  
ICP-CP508W LED Codepad Showing  
Figure 3:  
Audible Alarm Buttons ............................21  
Figure 4:  
Figure 5:  
Figure 6:  
Figure 7:  
Figure 8:  
Figure 9:  
RE012/E: 2-Channel Keyfob Transmitter25  
RE013/E: 4-Channel Keyfob Transmitter26  
Basic Pager Display ..................................45  
Split EOL Resistors Using NC Contacts 54  
Split EOL Resistors Using NO Contacts54  
Wiring Diagram for Keyswitch Zone .....58  
17.10 Siren Sound Rate..............................................71  
17.11 Auto Arming Pre-Alert Timer ........................72  
17.12 Auto Arming Time...........................................72  
17.13 Auto Disarming Time......................................72  
17.14 Kiss-Off Wait Time..........................................72  
17.15 System Time .....................................................72  
17.16 System Date......................................................72  
18.0  
18.1  
18.2  
18.3  
18.4  
18.5  
18.6  
18.7  
18.8  
19.0  
19.1  
Figure 10: WE800E Wireless ON/OFF Interface....76  
Figure 11: ICP-CC404 Wiring Diagram...................81  
Figure 12: ICP-CC404 Component Overlay ...........82  
Figure 13: Telecom Connection Diagram for  
Australia.....................................................83  
Figure 14: Telecom Connection Diagram for New  
Zealand ......................................................83  
Figure 15: Telecom Connection Diagram for China83  
System and Consumer Options ..................73  
System Options 1 .............................................73  
System Options 2 .............................................73  
System Options 3 .............................................74  
System Options 4 .............................................74  
Consumer Options 1........................................75  
Consumer Options 2........................................75  
Consumer Options 3........................................75  
Radio Input Options........................................76  
Optional Equipment .....................................76  
RE012E/RE013E 2-Channel/ 4-Channel  
Hand-Held Transmitters 433 MHz................76  
19.2  
19.3  
19.4  
19.5  
19.6  
19.7  
19.8  
19.9  
WE800E 433 MHz RF Receiver ....................76  
RE005E Two-Channel Radio Interface.........76  
CC891 Programming Key...............................76  
CC816 Alarm Link Software ..........................76  
CP5 Eight Zone LED Codepad (CP508W)...76  
CP5 Eight Zone LCD Codepad (CP508LW)77  
CP105A Night Arm Station ............................77  
PS101 Power Supply Module .........................77  
19.10 TF008 Plug Pack (TF008)................................77  
20.0  
20.1  
20.2  
20.3  
21.0  
21.1  
21.2  
21.3  
22.0  
22.1  
Terminals and Descriptions.........................78  
Terminal Descriptions .....................................78  
Glossary Of Terms...........................................79  
Diagrams ...........................................................81  
Specifications..................................................84  
Warranty Statement.........................................84  
Advice to Users ................................................84  
New Zealand Telepermit Notes......................84  
Programming Sheets.....................................85  
Country Codes................................................93  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | Contents  
Table 39: Telco Arm or Disarm Dialing Digits ......48  
Table 40: Default User Codes...................................51  
Table 41: Priority Levels ...........................................52  
Table 42: EOL Resistor Options..............................53  
Table 43: Zone Programming Defaults....................55  
Table 44: Zone Pulse Count Times..........................56  
Table 45: Zone Dialer Options.................................59  
Table 46: Zone Status Reporting Options...............61  
Table 47: Open/Close Reporting Options..............61  
Table 48: Codepad Alarm Reporting Options .......62  
Table 49: System Status Reporting Options ...........63  
Table 50: Test Reporting Time Parameters ............64  
Table 51: Test Reporting Options............................64  
Table 52: Output Parameters....................................64  
Table 53: Output Programming Defaults................64  
Table 54: Event Type Polarities ...............................69  
Table 55: Time Base Settings....................................70  
Table 56: Pulsing Time Settings ...............................70  
Table 57: One-Shot Time Settings ...........................70  
Table 58: Auto Arming Time Parameters...............72  
Table 59: Auto Disarming Time Parameters ..........72  
Table 60: System Time Parameters..........................72  
Table 61: System Date Parameters...........................73  
Tables  
Table 1:  
Table 2:  
Table 3:  
Table 4:  
Table 5:  
Zone Defaults...............................................8  
Zone Types ..................................................8  
Codepad Indicators.....................................9  
Programming Option Bits Example........10  
Installer’s Programming Mode  
Commands.................................................10  
Command 965 Defaults............................14  
Control Panel Type...................................14  
Zone Indicators .........................................16  
STAY Indicator.........................................16  
Table 6:  
Table 7:  
Table 8:  
Table 9:  
Table 10: AWAY Indicator.......................................16  
Table 11: MAINS Indicator......................................16  
Table 12: FAULT Indicator ......................................17  
Table 13: Audible Indicators.....................................17  
Table 14: Fault Indicators..........................................22  
Table 15: Horn Speaker Indication Beeps for  
Remote Operations...................................24  
Table 16: Strobe Indications for Remote  
Operations .................................................24  
Table 17: Codepad Indicators for Remote Radio  
User Numbers ...........................................25  
Table 18: Remote Output Event Types...................27  
Table 19: Installer Code Functions ..........................27  
Table 20: Domestic Dialing Digits............................28  
Table 62: Strobe Indications for Remote  
Operations.................................................73  
Table 21: Codepad Indicators When Changing  
Phone Numbers.........................................28  
Table 63: Horn Speaker Indication Beeps for  
Remote Operations...................................73  
Table 22: Telco Arming or Disarming Dialing  
Digits...........................................................29  
Table 23: Codepad Indicators When Changing the  
Telco Arming or Disarming Sequence ...29  
Table 64: Terminal Descriptions..............................78  
Table 65: Glossary .....................................................79  
Table 66: Specifications.............................................84  
Table 24: Telephone Monitor Mode Indications....31  
Table 25: Master Code Functions.............................32  
Table 26: Remote Radio Numbers Displayed by  
the Codepad Indicators............................32  
Table 27: Codepad Indicators When Changing  
Domestic Telephone Numbers................33  
Table 28: Domestic Dialing Digits............................33  
Table 29: Telco Arming or Disarming Dialing  
Digits...........................................................34  
Table 30: Codepad Indicators When Changing  
Telco Arming or Disarming Sequence ...34  
Table 31: Domestic Dialing Digits............................41  
Table 32: Contact ID Format Breakdown...............42  
Table 33: Point ID Codes..........................................43  
Table 34: Example Reporting in 4 + 2 Express  
Format........................................................43  
Table 35: 4 + 2 Express Reporting Format.............43  
Table 36: 4+2 Express Transmission Code  
Descriptions ...............................................44  
Table 37: Zone Status Display Descriptions............45  
Table 38: Dialing Digits.............................................46  
6
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 1.0 Introduction  
Sensor watch  
Day Alarm  
Walk Test Mode  
Delayed reporting  
1.0 Introduction  
Congratulations on selecting the ICP-CC404 Control  
Panel for your installation. Take the time to read  
through this guide and familiarize yourself with the  
outstanding operating and installation features of this  
system so you can get the most from your unit.  
40 events in non-volatile memory  
1.2  
Quick Start  
In all aspects of planning, engineering, styling,  
operation, convenience, and adaptability, we try to  
anticipate your every possible requirement.  
Programming simplicity and speed are major  
considerations; we believe that our objectives are  
more than satisfied.  
The following steps allow you to use the ICP-CC404  
Control Panel with factory default values. The default  
values allow the control panel to communicate in the  
Contact ID format. If you are not familiar with  
programming the range of control panels, read the  
information in Section 2.0 Programming on page 9  
before starting the installation.  
This Installation Guide explains all aspects of  
programming the ICP-CC404 Control Panel from  
factory default to final commissioning. All system  
parameters and options are detailed, but suitability is  
left to the individual. You can tailor each control  
panel to meet your requirements quickly and easily.  
The programming simplicity makes your installation  
quick, accurate, and rewarding.  
1. After all wiring is complete, connect the AC plug  
pack to the control panel.  
Both the MAINS and AWAY indicators light.  
The MAINS indicator lights to indicate that the  
AC MAINS supply is connected. The AWAY  
indicator lights to indicate that the system is  
armed in AWAY Mode.  
As control panels continue to improve over the years,  
they become very powerful. We have addressed the  
needs of some early first-time users who have  
advanced to true “power users,” while maintaining  
the simplicity of the product and the Installation  
Guide.  
If any 24-Hour zones are unsealed when you  
power up the system, the Siren, Strobe, and Bell  
Outputs activate into alarm and the  
corresponding zone indicators flash.  
2. Enter the default Master Code (2580) and press  
[AWAY] to disarm the system and to reset any  
alarm that occurred when you powered up the  
system.  
1.1  
Features  
The ICP-CC404 Security System uses the latest in  
microprocessor technology to provide you with useful  
features, and superior reliability and performance.  
The AWAY indicator turns off to signify that the  
system is disarmed.  
If any zone indicator flashes, an alarm occurred  
in that zone.  
The control panel provides these features:  
Eight programmable User Codes (1 to 8)  
Eight remote radio User Codes (9 to 16)  
Four programmable Burglary Zones  
Four programmable 24-Hour Zones  
Dual reporting  
On-board Line Fault Module  
Telco arming/disarming sequence  
Automatic arming and disarming  
Codepad Duress, Panic, Fire, and Medical  
Alarms  
STAY Mode and AWAY Mode operation  
Upload/download programmable  
Dynamic battery testing  
Entry and Exit Warning beeper  
Remote arming  
Answering machine bypass  
AC fail and system fault indicators  
Monitored Siren Output  
Strobe Output  
Relay Output  
Separate Fire Alarm sound  
EDMSAT – Satellite Siren-compatible  
Zone lockout  
If a zone indicator lights constantly, the zone is  
unsealed.  
3. Connect the backup battery.  
4. Enter the default Master Code (2580) and press  
[AWAY].  
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash simultaneously to indicate you  
entered Installer’s Programming Mode. You are  
automatically positioned at Location 000, the first  
digit of the Primary Telephone Number for  
Receiver 1.  
5. Enter the default Installer Code (1234) and press  
Enter the Primary Telephone Number, the  
Secondary Telephone Number, and the  
Subscriber ID Number for Receiver 1.  
Refer to Sections 11.1 on page 46, 11.2 on  
page 47, and 11.5 on page 47 for more  
information about programming these numbers.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 1.0  
Introduction  
When programming the telephone numbers for  
Receiver 1 and Receiver 2, you must program a 0  
as a 10. Programming a 0 in the telephone  
number indicates the end of the dialing sequence.  
Unless otherwise stated, program a 0 as a 0 in all  
locations other than the telephone numbers for  
Receiver 1 and Receiver 2, and the Call Back  
Telephone Number.  
1.2.2 Zone Defaults  
The default zone settings for the control panel are  
listed in Table 1. You can program Zones 1 to 4 to  
any of the zone types. Refer to Table 2 for the zone  
types you can select.  
Table 1:  
Zone Defaults  
6. If required, set the Test Report time. Program  
any other required changes. Otherwise, factory  
default settings are used. Refer to Section 15.21  
Test Reporting Time on page 63 for more  
information.  
Zone  
Zone Type  
Zone  
Zone Type  
1
2
3
4
Delay-1  
5
6
7
8
24-Hour Burglary  
24-Hour Burglary  
24-Hour Fire  
Handover  
Handover  
Instant  
7. Enter command [9 6 0] and press [AWAY] to exit  
from the Installer’s Programming Mode.  
24-Hour Tamper  
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators turn off. The system returns to the  
disarmed state and is ready for use. Refer to  
Section 2.4 Installer’s Programming Commands on  
page 10 for more information.  
1.2.3 Zone Types  
There are thirteen zone types to choose from when  
programming zones for the ICP-CC404 Control  
Panel. Refer to Section 14.3 Zone Programming on  
page 54 for more information.  
8. Use the Master Code to set the date and time.  
Refer to Section 1.2.1 Setting the Date and Time for  
more information.  
Table 2:  
Zone Types  
1.2.1 Setting the Date and Time  
Type  
Description  
Type Description  
1. Enter your Master Code and press [6][AWAY].  
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash.  
2. Enter the day, month, year, hour, and minute in  
DD, MM, YY, HH, MM format (where DD is the  
day of the month, MM is the month of the year,  
YY is the year, HH is the hour of the day, and  
MM minute of the day) and press [AWAY].  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Instant  
Handover  
Delay-1  
8
24-Hour Holdup  
9
24-Hour Tamper  
Reserved  
Keyswitch  
24-Hour Burglary  
24-Hour Fire  
Chime only  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Delay-2  
Reserved  
Reserved  
24-Hour Medical  
24-Hour Panic  
Zone not used  
Use 24:00 hour format when programming the  
hour of the day.  
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators turn off. If a long beep sounds, there  
was an error when you entered the date and time.  
Example  
To set the date and time for the 1st January 2006 at  
10:30 PM, enter:  
[2 5 8 0 6][AWAY][0 1 0 1 0 6 2 2 3 0][AWAY]  
8
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 2.0 Programming  
Table 3:  
Codepad Indicators  
Zone Indicators  
2.0 Programming  
The control panel programming options are stored in  
a non-volatile EPROM. This memory holds all  
configuration and user-specific data even after a total  
power loss.  
Data  
Value  
0
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MAINS  
X
Because the data retention time is up to ten years  
without power, no reprogramming is required after  
powering down the control panel.  
X
3
4
X
X
You can change data as many times as necessary  
without any additional specialized equipment. The  
memory is organized in locations, each of which  
holds the data for a specific function.  
5
6
7
8
X
X
X
X
X
9
X
X
15 is the maximum value that you can  
program into any location.  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
In general, the entire programming sequence consists  
of selecting the required location, and then entering  
or changing the current data. Repeat this procedure  
until you program all the required data. The factory  
default settings are selected for reporting to the  
monitoring station in Contact ID format.  
X
X
X
To move to a different programming location:  
Enter the location number and press [AWAY].  
The Installer Code provides access only to the  
Installer’s Programming Mode and does not allow  
you to arm and disarm the system. You cannot enter  
Installer’s Programming Mode when the system is  
armed, or at any time during siren run time.  
For example, press [3 4][AWAY] to automatically  
step you to the beginning of the Subscriber ID  
Number for Receiver 1. The data stored in the new  
location appears.  
To move to the next location:  
You can program the ICP-CC404 Control Panel  
using any of these three devices:  
Press [AWAY].  
Remote codepad  
CC816 Alarm Link Upload/Download Software  
For example, if you are currently positioned at  
Location 034, press [AWAY] to step to Location 035.  
2.1  
Programming with the Remote  
Codepad  
To move to the previous location:  
Press [STAY].  
To program the control panel using the remote  
codepad, the system must be disarmed with no alarm  
memory present.  
For example, if you are positioned at Location 035,  
press [STAY] to step back to Location 034.  
To change data in the current location:  
To access Installer’s Programming Mode:  
Enter the new value (0 to 15) and press [STAY].  
Enter the four-digit Installer Code (the factory default  
is 1234) and press [AWAY].  
The data is stored and you remain positioned at the  
same location. The codepad indicators show the new  
value (for example, if you enter [1 4] and press  
[STAY], the Zone 4 and MAINS indicators light).  
Two beeps sound and both the AWAY and the  
STAY indicators flash simultaneously to indicate that  
you entered Installer’s Programming Mode.  
To exit from the Installer’s Programming Mode:  
When you enter Installer’s Programming Mode, you  
are automatically positioned at Location 000, the first  
digit of the Primary Telephone Number for Receiver  
1. The codepad indicators display the current data  
stored in this location.  
Enter command [9 6 0] and press [AWAY].  
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators turn off. The system returns to the  
disarmed state and is now ready for use.  
Refer to Section 2.4 Installer’s Programming Commands  
on page 10 for more information about using  
Installer’s Programming Mode.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 2.0  
Programming  
2.3  
Programming Option Bits  
2.2  
Programming with the  
Programming Key  
When programming some locations, there are up to  
four options per location. You can select one, two,  
three, or all four options for each location, but you  
can program only one value for the location.  
Calculate this value by adding the option bit numbers  
together.  
The CC891 Programming Key allows you to store or  
copy programming information from your control  
panel. After storing information in the programming  
key, you can easily program other ICP-CC404  
Control Panels with the same programming data. You  
can also use the programming key to back up existing  
information.  
Example  
To select Options 1 and 4 for Location 177, add the  
numbers together and program the sum. In this  
example, program a 5 in the location (1 + 4 = 5).  
If you connect the programming key to the control  
panel when it is disarmed, the key automatically  
initiates a data transfer to the control panel’s memory.  
Table 4:  
Programming Option Bits Example  
If you have a new programming key, enter Installer’s  
Programming Mode, program the system as required,  
and connect the programming key to the control  
panel.  
Option Description  
1
2
4
Allow dialer reporting functions  
Enable remote arming by telephone  
Enable answering machine bypass only when  
armed  
Enabled = Use Bell 103 for FSK format  
Disabled = CCITT V21 format  
To connect the programming key, locate the socket  
labelled PROGRAMMING KEY at the top of the  
printed circuit board (PCB) next to the Auxiliary  
Module socket. Observe the triangular markings on  
the PCB and align them with the markings on the  
programming key.  
8
2.4  
Installer’s Programming Commands  
To copy data from the control panel data to the  
programming key:  
1. Enter the Installer Code (the default is 1234) and  
press [#] to enter Installer’s Programming Mode.  
2. Enter [9 6 2 #].  
There are ten commands you can use in Installer’s  
Programming Mode. To issue the command, enter  
the command number and press [#].  
Table 5:  
Installer’s Programming Mode  
Commands  
Refer to Section 2.4.5 Command 962 – Copy the  
Control Panel Memory to the Programming Key on  
page 12 for more information.  
3. Enter [9 6 0 #] to exit from the Installer’s  
Programming Mode.  
Command Function  
959  
960  
961  
962  
Test the programming key  
Refer to Section 2.4.2 on page 11.  
Exit from Installer’s Programming Mode  
Refer to Section 2.4.3 on page 12.  
Reset the control panel to factory defaults  
Refer to Section 2.4.4 on page 12.  
Copy the control panel memory to the  
programming key  
Two beeps sound and the system returns to the  
disarmed state. Before removing the  
programming key, wait 2 sec for the activity LED  
to return to its normal state. The programming  
key becomes your standard data pattern for  
future control panel programming.  
If you enter Installer’s Programming Mode, insert a  
programming key, and change the data in any  
location. The data for both the programming key and  
the control panel is changed at the same time.  
Refer to Section 2.4.5 page 12.  
963  
Copy the programming key data to the  
control panel memory  
Refer to Section 2.4.6 on page 12.  
964  
965  
966  
999  
Erase the programming key  
Refer to Section 2.4.7 on page 13.  
Set up domestic dialing format  
Refer to Section 2.4.8 on page 13.  
Enable or disable Auto Step Mode  
Refer to Section 2.4.9 on page 13.  
Display the software version number or  
control panel type  
Refer to Section 2.4.10 on page 14.  
If you do not enter Installer’s  
Programming Mode first, connecting the  
CC891 Programming Key to the control  
panel when the programming key  
memory is blank corrupts the control  
panel’s memory. If this occurs, you must  
return the control panel to Bosch  
Security Systems, Inc. to unlock the  
control panel’s memory. A service fee is  
charged.  
10  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 2.0 Programming  
2.4.1 Command 958 – Enable/Disable Zone  
Status Mode  
2.4.2 Command 959 – Test the Programming  
Key  
This function enables and disables Zone Status  
Display Mode when using the hand-held  
programmer. The hand-held programmer shows the  
zones on the seven-segment display from left to right.  
If there is a dash lit on the display of the hand-held  
programmer, the corresponding zone is unsealed. If  
the display is blank, the zone is sealed.  
This command initiates a test of the programming  
key. You can use the CC891 Programming Key only  
with the ICP-CC404 Control Panel.  
The programming key test is non-destructive and any  
data in the programming key remains after the test is  
completed. One long beep indicates that the  
programming key test failed. Two beeps indicate a  
successful test.  
The third (or centre) display shows either 4 or 8. A 4  
indicates that Zones 1 to 4 are shown. An 8 indicates  
that Zones 5 to 8 are shown.  
If you remove the programming key  
before the test is done, the programming  
key data becomes corrupt. Do not  
remove the programming key while the  
activity LED is lit or pulsing rapidly.  
Press [#] to toggle the display between Zones 1 to 4  
and 5 to 8. This feature is very useful during  
installation because you can view the zone status at  
the control panel, saving you time and money.  
To test the programming key:  
To enable Zone Status Mode:  
1. Enter the Installer Code (the default is 1234) and  
press [#] to enter Installer’s Programming Mode.  
1. Enter the Installer Code (the default is 1234) and  
press [#] to enter Installer’s Programming Mode.  
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash on the remote codepad to  
indicate that you entered Installer’s Programming  
Mode. The remote codepad displays the data  
stored in Location 000.  
Two beeps sound and the programmer displays  
the data stored in Location 000.  
2. Enter [9 5 8 #].  
Two beeps sound and 4 appears in the centre  
display to indicate Zones 1 to 4 are shown.  
2. Connect the programming key to the  
PROGRAMMING KEY pins (next to the  
Auxiliary Module socket) at the top of the control  
panel printed circuit board.  
To disable Zone Status Mode:  
Enter [9 5 8 #].  
Two beeps sound and you return to Installer’s  
Programming Mode.  
3. Enter [9 5 9 #].  
Two beeps sound after a successful test of the  
programming key. A long beep indicates that the  
programming key data is corrupt and must be  
erased to clear the corrupt data. Refer to Section  
2.4.7 Command 964 – Erase the Programming Key on  
page 13 for more information.  
Example  
A hyphen (–) in the display indicates that the zone is  
unsealed.  
A blank display indicates that the zone is sealed.  
- - 4 - -  
4. Enter [9 6 0 #] to from the Installer’s  
Programming Mode.  
indicates that Zone 1 is sealed and Zones 2, 3, and 4  
are unsealed.  
Two beeps sound. The STAY and AWAY  
indicators turn off on the remote codepad and the  
system returns to the disarmed state.  
- 8 -  
indicates that Zones 5 and 8 are unsealed and Zones  
6 and 7 are sealed.  
5. Remove the programming key from the control  
panel.  
Failure to exit from the Installer’s Programming  
Mode before removing the programming key can  
corrupt the data in the programming key.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 2.0  
Programming  
Two beeps sound after the control panel memory  
is successfully copied to the programming key. A  
long beep indicates that the programming key is  
corrupt and must be erased to clear the corrupt  
data. Refer to Section 2.4.7 Command 964 – Erase  
the Programming Key on page 13 for more  
information.  
2.4.3 Command 960 – Exit from the Installer's  
Programming Mode  
This command exits from the Installer’s  
Programming Mode. You can exit from the Installer’s  
Programming Mode from any location.  
To exit from the Installer’s Programming Mode:  
Enter [9 6 0 #].  
4. Enter command [9 6 0 #] to exit from the  
Installer’s Programming Mode.  
Two beeps sound and the system returns to the  
disarmed state. When using the remote codepad, the  
STAY and AWAY indicators turn off.  
The STAY and AWAY indicators turn off on the  
remote codepad to indicate that the system is  
disarmed.  
2.4.4 Command 961 – Reset the Control Panel to  
Factory Default Settings  
5. Remove the programming key from the control  
panel.  
This command resets the control panel to factory  
default values. Default values are listed throughout  
this guide and in the programming sheets in  
Section 22.0 on page 85. You can reset the control  
panel from any location.  
Failure to exit from the Installer’s Programming  
Mode before removing the programming key can  
corrupt the programming key.  
2.4.6 Command 963 – Copy the Programming  
Key to the Control Panel  
To reset the control panel to factory defaults:  
This command copies data from the programming  
key to the control panel. You can only use the CC891  
Programming Key with the ICP-CC404 Control  
Panel.  
1. Enter the Installer Code (the default is 1234) and  
press [#] to enter Installer’s Programming Mode.  
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash on the remote codepad to  
indicate you entered Installer’s Programming  
Mode. The remote codepad shows the data  
stored in Location 000.  
To copy the programming key memory to the  
control panel:  
1. Enter the Installer Code (the default is 1234) and  
press [#] to enter Installer’s Programming Mode.  
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash on the remote codepad to  
indicate you entered Installer’s Programming  
Mode. The remote codepad shows the data  
stored in Location 000.  
2. Enter [9 6 1 #].  
Two beeps sound and the system resets to the  
factory default values.  
2.4.5 Command 962 – Copy the Control Panel  
Memory to the Programming Key  
This command copies the control panel memory to  
the programming key. You can only use the CC891  
Programming Key with the ICP-CC404 Control  
Panel.  
2. Connect the programming key to the  
PROGRAMMING KEY pins (next to the  
Auxiliary Module socket) at the top of the control  
panel’s printed circuit board.  
3. Enter [9 6 3 #].  
To copy the control panel memory to the  
programming key:  
1. Enter the Installer Code (the default is 1234) and  
press [#] to enter Installer’s Programming Mode.  
Two beeps sound after the programming key’s  
data is successfully copied to the control panel. A  
long beep indicates that the programming key is  
corrupt and must be erased to clear the corrupt  
data. Refer to Section 2.4.7 Command 964 – Erase  
the Programming Key on page 13 for more  
information.  
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash on the remote codepad to  
indicate you entered Installer’s Programming  
Mode. The remote codepad shows the data  
stored in Location 000.  
4. Enter [9 6 0 #] to exit from the Installer’s  
Programming Mode.  
2. Connect the programming key to the  
PROGRAMMING KEY pins (next to the  
Auxiliary Module socket) at the top of the control  
panel’s printed circuit board.  
The STAY and AWAY indicators turn off on the  
remote codepad to indicate that the system is  
disarmed.  
5. Remove the programming key from the control  
panel.  
3. Enter [9 6 2 #].  
Failing to exit from the Installer’s Programming  
Mode before removing the programming key can  
corrupt the programming key.  
12  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 2.0 Programming  
As shown in Table 6 on page 14, the transmission  
format is automatically set for domestic dialing and  
the Subscriber ID Number set for one identification  
beep. All reports, except Zone Status reporting and  
System Status reporting, are allocated to Receiver 1  
for domestic dialing.  
2.4.7 Command 964 – Erase the Programming  
Key  
This command erases all data from the programming  
key. You can only use the CC891 Programming Key  
with the ICP-CC404 Control Panel.  
To erase the programming key:  
Zone Status Reports, including Zone Bypass, Zone  
Trouble, Sensor Watch, and Alarm Restore codes,  
and System Status Reports, including AUX Power  
Supply Fail, AC Fail, Low Battery, and Access  
Denied Reports, are allocated to Receiver 2 and do  
not report unless Receiver 2 is also set up to report.  
1. Enter the Installer Code (the default is 1234) and  
press [#] to enter Installer’s Programming Mode.  
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash on the remote codepad to  
indicate you entered Installer’s Programming  
Mode. The remote codepad shows the data  
stored in Location 000.  
2. Connect the programming key to the  
PROGRAMMING KEY pins (next to the  
Auxiliary Module socket) at the top of the control  
panel’s printed circuit board.  
2.4.9 Command 966 – Enable or Disable Auto  
Step Mode  
This command allows you to enable or disable Auto  
Step Mode when programming in Installer’s  
Programming Mode. When programming with the  
remote codepad, there is no visual indication that  
Auto Step Mode is enabled.  
3. Enter [9 6 4 #].  
Two beeps sound after the data is deleted.  
4. Enter [9 6 0 #] to exit from the Installer’s  
Programming Mode.  
If the Auto Step Mode is enabled, pressing [*]  
automatically moves you to the next programming  
location.  
The STAY and AWAY indicators turn off on the  
remote codepad to indicate that the system is  
disarmed.  
If Auto Step Mode is disabled, you must move to the  
next location by pressing [#]. The example below  
shows that Auto Step Mode is very useful when  
programming successive locations.  
5. Remove the programming key from the control  
panel.  
Failing to exit from the Installer’s Programming  
Mode before removing the programming key can  
corrupt the programming key.  
To enable Auto Step Mode:  
1. Enter the Installer Code (default = 1234) and  
press [#] to enter Installer’s Programming Mode.  
2.4.8 Command 965 – Set Up Domestic Dialing  
Format  
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash on the remote codepad to show  
you entered Installer’s Programming Mode. The  
remote codepad displays the data stored in  
Location 000.  
Command 965 simplifies the setup of the domestic  
dialing format to a one-step operation. Refer to Section  
9.0 Domestic Dialing on page 40 for more information.  
2. Enter [9 6 6 #].  
Two beeps sound.  
To disable Auto Step Mode:  
Enter [9 6 6 #].  
To set up domestic dialing format:  
1. Enter the Installer Code (the default is 1234) and  
press [#] to enter Installer’s Programming Mode.  
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash on the remote codepad to  
indicate you entered Installer’s Programming  
Mode. The remote codepad shows the data  
stored in Location 000.  
Two beeps sound.  
2. Enter [9 6 1 #].  
The command automatically sets Receiver 1 to  
domestic reporting and sets the locations shown  
in bold in Table 6 on page 14 for Receiver 2 only.  
No other locations are changed when you issue  
Command 965.  
All domestic telephone numbers are stored in  
Locations 466 to 513. For more information, refer to  
Section 9.2 Setting Up and Programming Domestic  
Reporting on page 41.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 2.0  
Programming  
Table 6:  
Command 965 Defaults  
Description  
Location  
032  
033  
Default Value  
Setting  
Handshake Tone for Receiver 1  
Transmission Format  
1
4
(Handshake Tone)  
(Domestic)  
034 to 039  
332  
333 and 334 Open/Close Reports  
335  
356 to 358  
359  
Subscriber ID Number  
0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1  
2
11, 12  
2
6, 7, 12  
2
0, 0, 0, 0, 7, 1, 0  
1
(1 Beep)  
Zone Status Reporting Options  
(Receiver 2 only)  
(Open/Close Reports)  
(Receiver 2 only)  
(Access Denied)  
(Receiver 2 only)  
(Test Reports)  
(Receiver 1 only)  
Open/Close Reporting Options  
System Status – Access Denied  
System Status Reporting Options  
Test Report Time  
360 to 366  
367  
Test Reporting Dialer Options  
To show the control panel type or software  
version number:  
1. Enter the Installer Code (the default is 1234) and  
press [#] to enter Installer’s Programming Mode.  
Two beeps sound and the remote codepad shows  
the data programmed in Location 000.  
Example (Auto Step Mode Enabled)  
To enter the Primary Telephone Number 02 (pause)  
9672 1055 when Auto Step Mode is enabled:  
1. Press [0 #].  
You are positioned at Location 000 (the Primary  
Telephone Number for Receiver 1).  
2. To program the number, press:  
If you are using the remote codepad, the STAY  
and AWAY indicators flash to indicate you  
entered Installer’s Programming Mode.  
[10 * 2 * 13 * 9 * 6 * 7 * 2 * 1 * 10 * 5 * 5 * 0*]  
Example (Auto Step Mode Disabled)  
2. Enter [9 9 9 #].  
Two beeps sound.  
To enter the Primary Telephone Number 02 (pause)  
9672 1055 when Auto Step Mode is disabled:  
1. Press [0 #].  
If you are using the remote codepad, the codepad  
displays a zone indicator corresponding to the  
control panel type. Refer to Table 7 for more  
information.  
You are positioned at Location 000 (the Primary  
Telephone Number for Receiver 1).  
2. To program the number, press:  
Table 7:  
Control Panel Type  
[10 * # 2 * # 13 * # 9 * # 6 * # 7 * # 2 * # 1 * #  
10 * # 5 * # 5 * # 0 *]  
2.4.10 Command 999 – Display the Panel Type or  
Software Version Number  
Indicator  
Control Panel Type  
ICP-CC404  
ICP-CC408  
4
8
When using the remote codepad, this command  
shows the version of the control panel. Because  
different control panels use the same printed circuit  
board (PCB), it is difficult to determine the control  
panel the PCB is set to.  
ICP-CC488  
3. Press [#] to exit from this command and return to  
the Installer’s Programming Mode.  
4. Enter [9 6 0 #] to exit from the Installer's  
Programming Mode.  
Two sound and the system returns to the  
disarmed state.  
If you are using the remote codepad, the STAY  
and AWAY indicators turn off to indicate the  
system is disarmed.  
14  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 2.0 Programming  
Two beeps sound. The STAY and AWAY  
indicators flashes to indicate you entered  
Installer’s Programming Mode.  
2.5  
Disable Factory Defaults  
Program the Disable Factory Defaults feature in  
Location 900.  
2. Enter [9 6 5 #].  
The default value is 0.  
Two beeps sound after the control panel is  
successfully reset.  
3. Enter [9 6 0 #].  
This feature disables the DEFAULT button on the  
control panel printed circuit board (PCB) to prevent  
an operator from resetting the control panel to default  
values. This feature also prevents using a  
Two beeps sound. The STAY and AWAY  
indicators stop flashing and the system returns to  
the disarmed state.  
programming key when the system is disarmed.  
Program 0 into this location to enable the DEFAULT  
button and to allow updates to location data using the  
programming key. Program 15 to disable the  
DEFAULT button and to require the Installer Code  
to program the control panel.  
The control panel is now successfully reset to the  
factory settings.  
To reset the control panel using the default  
button:  
1. Disconnect the AC MAINS supply and the  
backup battery from the control panel.  
If the Installer Code is unknown, you must return the  
control panel to your Bosch Distributor for exchange.  
A nominal fee applies for this service.  
Press and hold the DEFAULT button. The  
DEFAULT button is located at the top of the  
PCB next to the PROGRAMMING KEY socket.  
Using this feature is not recommended.  
2. Reconnect the AC MAINS supply to the control  
panel.  
If you need to disable the DEFAULT button, holding  
down the DEFAULT button on the PCB when  
programming this location prevents you from  
accidentally setting this option.  
3. Wait 3 to 5 sec and release the button.  
4. Enter [2 5 8 0 *] to disarm the system using the  
default Master Code.  
The control panel is successfully reset to the  
factory settings.  
To prevent manual resetting of the control panel  
to default values:  
1. Enter the Installer Code (the default is 1234) and  
press [#] to enter Installer’s Programming Mode.  
If the option to restore the default control  
panel settings is disabled using Location  
900:  
Two beeps sound and the remote codepad shows  
the data programmed in Location 000.  
The dialer seize relay (RL2) clicks four  
times. You must return the control  
panel to Bosch Security Systems, Inc.  
for exchange. If the Installer Code is  
unknown, a service fee is charged to  
unlock the control panel’s memory  
If you are using the remote codepad, the STAY  
and AWAY indicators flash to indicate you  
entered Installer’s Programming Mode.  
2. Enter [9 0 0 #] to move to Location 900.  
3. Press and hold the DEFAULT button.  
When programmed to disable the  
default control panel setting, you  
cannot use the command [961#] to  
retrieve the programming data.  
The DEFAULT button is located at the top of the  
PCB next to the PROGRAMMING KEY socket.  
4. Enter [1 5 *] to program 15 into Location 900.  
5. Release the button.  
The use of this feature is not  
6. Enter [9 6 0 #] to exit from the Installer’s  
Programming Mode.  
recommended.  
Two beeps sound and the system returns to the  
disarmed state. If you are using a remote  
codepad, the STAY and AWAY indicators turn  
off to indicate the system is disarmed.  
If Location 900 is not programmed as 15, use one of  
these procedures to successfully reset the control  
panel to the factory default settings.  
To reset the control panel using the Installer  
Code:  
1. Enter the Installer Code (the default is 1234) and  
press [#] to enter Installer’s Programming Mode.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 3.0  
Codepad Indicators  
Section 6.2.5 on page 35 to use the Master Code  
to set zones to automatically isolate in STAY  
Mode 2.  
3.0 Codepad Indicators  
3.1  
ICP-CP508W Eight Zone LED  
Codepad  
Table 9:  
STAY Indicator  
Figure 1: ICP-CP508W Eight Zone LED  
Codepad  
Indicator  
Definition  
On  
The system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or  
STAY Mode 2  
Off  
The system is not armed in STAY Mode 1 or  
STAY Mode 2  
Flashing  
Zone Isolating Mode or setting STAY Mode 2  
zones  
AWAY Indicator  
The AWAY indicator lights when the system is  
armed in AWAY Mode. The AWAY indicator flashes  
with the STAY indicator when you are in Installer’s  
Programming Mode or you are using a Master Code  
function.  
The codepad is the communications interface  
between you and the alarm system. The codepad  
allows you to issue commands and offers visual and  
audible indications to guide you through general  
operation.  
Refer to Section 4.1 Arming the System in AWAY Mode  
on page 18 for more information.  
The codepad incorporates a number of indicators:  
eight zone indicators show the condition of each zone  
and four other indicators show general status. These  
indicators are described in Table 8 through Table 13  
on page 17.  
Table 10: AWAY Indicator  
Indicator  
On  
Definition  
The system is armed in AWAY Mode  
The system is not armed in AWAY Mode  
Off  
Zone Indicators  
MAINS Indicator  
Table 8:  
Zone Indicators  
The MAINS indicator shows whether the system’s  
AC MAINS supply is normal or failed.  
Indicator  
On  
Off  
Flashing fast  
(0.25 sec on/0.25 sec off)  
Definition  
When programming in Installer’s Programming  
Mode or using a Master Code function, the MAINS  
indicator lights to indicate a location value from 10  
to 15. The MAINS indicator represents the 10 digit,  
which is added to the value of the lit zone indicator  
(for example, if the value programmed in a location  
is 12, the MAINS and Zone 2 indicators light).  
The zone is unsealed  
The zone is sealed  
The zone is in alarm  
Flashing slow  
(1 sec on/1 sec off)  
The zone is manually  
isolated  
STAY Indicator  
Table 11: MAINS Indicator  
The STAY indicator lights when the system is armed  
in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2. The STAY  
indicator flashes with the AWAY indicator when you  
are in Installer’s Programming Mode or you are using  
a Master Code function.  
Indicator  
On  
Flashing  
Definition  
The AC MAINS power is normal  
The AC MAINS supply failed  
For more information, refer to:  
FAULT Indicator  
Section 4.3 on page 19 to arm the system in STAY  
Mode 1.  
Section 14.3.4 on page 57 to set zones to  
automatically isolate in STAY Mode 1.  
Section 4.5 on page 20 to arm the system in STAY  
Mode 2.  
Section 6.1.4 on page 30 to use the Installer Code  
to set zones to automatically isolate in STAY  
Mode 2.  
The FAULT indicator lights when the system detects  
a system fault. Refer to Section 4.12 Fault Analysis Mode  
on page 22 for more information on system faults.  
Each time a new system fault is detected (the FAULT  
indicator flashes), the codepad beeps once per  
minute.  
Press [AWAY] to stop the beeping and to  
acknowledge the fault.  
16  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 3.0 Codepad Indicators  
Zone Indicators  
Table 12: FAULT Indicator  
The zone indicators (1 to 8) show the  
status of the zones as listed in Table 8 on  
1 2 3 …  
Indicator  
On  
Off  
Definition  
page 16.  
A system fault must be corrected  
The system is normal (no faults)  
A system fault must be acknowledged  
AWAY Indicator  
The AWAY indicator lights when the  
system is armed in AWAY Mode. The  
ON indicator also lights when the  
system is armed in AWAY Mode (refer  
to Table 10 on page 16).  
Flashing  
Audible Indicators  
The codepad provides these audible indications:  
The AWAY indicator flashes with the STAY  
indicator when you are in Installer’s Programming  
Mode or you are using a Master Code function.  
Table 13: Audible Indicators  
Audible Indicator Definition  
Refer to Section 4.1 Arming the System in AWAY Mode  
on page 18 for more information.  
One short beep  
Two short beeps  
A button was pressed on the  
codepad, or Exit Time ended when  
arming in STAY Mode 1 or STAY  
Mode 2  
STAY Indicator  
The STAY indicator lights when the  
system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or  
STAY Mode 2 (refer to Table 9 on  
page 16).  
The system accepted the code  
Three short beeps The system executed the requested  
function  
One long beep  
Exit Time ended when arming in  
AWAY Mode, or the requested  
operation was denied or aborted  
The STAY indicator also flashes with the AWAY  
indicator when you are in Installer’s Programming  
Mode or you are using a Master Code function.  
One short beep  
every second  
Walk Test Mode is currently active,  
or warning before automatic arming  
takes place  
The ON indicator also lights when the system is  
armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2.  
One short beep  
every 2 sec  
Telephone Monitor Mode is active.  
For more information, refer to:  
One short beep  
every minute  
There is a system fault to  
acknowledge  
Section 4.3 on page 19 to arm the system in  
STAY Mode 1.  
Section 14.3.4 on page 57 to set zones to  
automatically isolate in STAY Mode 1.  
Section 4.5 on page 20 to arm the system in  
STAY Mode 2.  
Section 6.1.4 on page 30 to use the Installer Code  
to set zones to automatically isolate in STAY  
Mode 2.  
3.2  
ICP-CP508LW Eight Zone LCD  
Codepad  
Figure 2: ICP-CP508LW Eight Zone LCD  
Codepad  
Section 6.2.5 on page 35 to use the Master Code  
to set zones to automatically isolate in STAY  
Mode 2.  
System Disarmed  
This indicator lights with the OFF  
indicator when the system is disarmed.  
MAINS Indicator  
The MAINS indicator shows when the  
systems AC MAINS supply is normal or  
failed (refer to Table 11 on page 16).  
The codepad is the communications interface  
between you and the alarm system. The codepad  
allows you to issue commands and offers visual and  
audible indications to guide you through general  
operation.  
When programming in Installer’s Programming  
Mode or using a Master Code function, the MAINS  
indicator lights to indicate a location value from 10 to  
15. The MAINS indicator represents the 10 digit,  
which is added to the value of the lit zone indicator  
(for example, if the value programmed in a location is  
12, the MAINS and Zone 2 indicators light).  
The codepad uses a number of indicators: eight zone  
indicators show the condition of each zone and seven  
other indicators show general status. These indicators  
are described in this section.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 4.0  
System Operations  
There are two different methods to arm the system in  
Zone Isolating Mode  
AWAY Mode. You can always use the first method.  
You can use the other method only if Option 2 is  
enabled in Location 429 (refer to Section 18.6  
Consumer Options 2 on page 75).  
This indicator (the person) flashes once  
every 3 sec when you attempt to isolate  
zones or program zones to automatically  
isolate for STAY Mode 2.  
Flashing  
If you must isolate a zone(s) before arming the system  
in AWAY Mode, refer to Section 4.11 Isolating Zones  
on page 21.  
For more information, refer to:  
Section 4.11 on page 21 to manually isolate zones.  
Section 6.1.4 on page 30 to use the Installer Code  
to set zones to automatically isolated in STAY  
Mode 2.  
Single button arming in AWAY Mode  
reports as User Code number 16.  
Section 6.2.5 on page 35 to use the Master Code  
to set zones to automatically isolate in STAY  
Mode 2.  
To arm the system in AWAY Mode (method one):  
Enter your code and press [AWAY].  
Fault Indicator  
Two beeps sound, the AWAY indicator lights, and  
Exit Time starts.  
The fault indicator lights when the  
system detects a system fault (refer to  
Table 12 on page 17). Refer to Section  
4.12 Fault Analysis Mode on page 22 for  
more information on system faults.  
To arm the system in AWAY Mode (method two):  
Select Option 2 in Location 429 to  
enable single button arming in AWAY  
Mode (refer to Section 18.6 Consumer  
Options 2 on page 75).  
Each time a new system fault is detected (the fault  
indicator flashes), the codepad beeps once per  
minute. Press [AWAY] to stop the beeping and  
acknowledge the fault.  
1. Press and hold [AWAY].  
2. When two beeps sound, release the button.  
The AWAY indicator lights and Exit Time starts.  
Programming Mode  
If a zone is not sealed at the end of Exit Time, the  
zone is automatically isolated and its indicator lights  
on the remote codepad. The zone becomes an active  
part of the system again after it is resealed. For  
example, if a window is open when Exit Time  
expires, the window is not an active part of the  
system until it is closed. Opening the window after  
Exit Time expires causes an alarm.  
These two indicators flash when you  
enter Installer’s Programming Mode or  
use any Master Code function.  
Flashing  
OFF Indicator/Zone Sealed  
The OFF indicator lights when the  
system is disarmed and flashes when a  
zone becomes unsealed when disarmed.  
The indicator stops flashing when all  
zones are sealed.  
Forced Arming  
Arming the system when a zone is not sealed is  
known as forced arming. Refer to Section 14.3.6 Zone  
Options 2 on page 58 to enable forced arming for each  
zone.  
ON Indicator/Zone in Alarm  
The ON indicator lights when the system  
is armed and flashes when an alarm  
occurs. The indicator resets after a valid  
User Code is entered.  
If the AWAY indicator does not light and a long beep  
sounds when you attempt to arm the system in  
AWAY Mode, forced arming is not permitted. If this  
is the case, you seal all zones or manually isolate  
them before you can arm the system.  
Audible Indicators  
The codepad provides a number of audible  
indications. Refer to Table 13 on page 17.  
4.2  
Disarming the System from AWAY  
Mode  
4.0 System Operations  
This section explains the general operations of the  
system: arming and disarming the system in the three  
modes, isolating zones, initiating codepad alarms, and  
determining a fault.  
When you enter the premises after the system is  
armed in AWAY Mode, you must disarm the system  
from AWAY Mode to disable detection devices that  
activate the siren, strobe, and bell outputs.  
If there was an alarm before disarming the system  
from AWAY Mode, a zone indicator flashes to  
indicate a previous alarm in that zone.  
4.1  
Arming the System in AWAY Mode  
Arming the system in AWAY Mode is normally  
performed when you leave the premises and want all  
zones ready to detect an intrusion.  
To disarm the system from AWAY Mode:  
Enter your code and press [AWAY].  
18  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 4.0 System Operations  
Two beeps sound and the AWAY indicator is  
extinguished.  
The indicators for any zones programmed to  
automatically isolate in STAY Mode 1 flash until Exit  
Time expires. At the end of Exit Time, the zone  
indicators turn off and the codepad sounds one short  
beep.  
4.3  
Arming the System in STAY Mode 1  
Use STAY Mode 1 when you need to arm the  
perimeter and unused areas of the premises to detect  
a would-be intruder from entering the premises, while  
at the same time moving freely within an  
automatically isolated area.  
If a zone is not sealed at the end of Exit Time, the  
zone is automatically isolated and is constantly lit on  
the remote codepad. The zone becomes an active  
part of the system again after it is resealed. For  
example, if a window is open when Exit Time  
expires, the window does not become an active part  
of the system until it is closed. Opening the window  
after Exit Time expires causes an alarm.  
Only the installer can program zones to automatically  
isolate in STAY Mode 1. Refer to Section 14.3.6 Zone  
Options 2 on page 58 for more information on setting  
zones to automatically isolate in STAY Mode 1.  
There are two methods to arm your system in STAY  
Mode 1. You can always use the first method. You  
can use the other method only if Option 2 is enabled  
in Location 429 (refer to Section 18.6 Consumer  
Options 2 on page 75).  
Forced Arming  
Arming the system when a zone is not sealed is  
known as forced arming. Refer to Section 14.3.6 Zone  
Options 2 to enable forced arming for each zone.  
If the STAY indicator does not light and a long beep  
sounds when you attempt to arm the system in STAY  
Mode 1, forced arming is not permitted. If this is the  
case, you must seal all zones or manually isolate them  
before you can arm the system.  
Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode  
When arming the system in STAY Mode 1, an  
optional entry timer called Entry Guard Timer for  
STAY Mode can delay the siren, strobe, and bell  
outputs if a zone that is not automatically isolated  
activates an alarm. Entry Guard Timer for STAY  
Mode is the delay time used for all zones, except 24-  
Hour zones, when the system is armed in STAY  
Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2.  
4.4  
Disarming the System from STAY  
Mode 1  
There are two methods to disarm the system from  
STAY Mode 1. You can always use the first method.  
You can use the other method only if Option 4 is  
selected in Location 429 (refer to Section 18.6  
Consumer Options 2 on page 75).  
If the Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode is  
programmed and a zone that was not automatically  
isolated is activated, the codepad beeps twice per sec  
until the Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode expires  
or the system is disarmed. If the alarm is not reset  
before Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode expires,  
the system activates the strobe, bell, and siren  
outputs.  
To disarm the system from STAY Mode 1 (method  
one):  
Enter your code and press [STAY].  
Two beeps sound and the STAY indicator is  
extinguished. The system is now disarmed.  
Single button arming in STAY Mode 1  
reports as User Code number 16.  
You cannot use method two unless both  
Options 2 and 4 are enabled in  
Location 429.  
To arm the system from STAY Mode 1 (method  
one):  
To disarm the system from STAY Mode 1 (method  
two):  
Enter your code and press [STAY].  
Two beeps sound and the STAY indicator lights. Exit  
Time starts.  
A flashing zone indicator represents a previous alarm  
in that zone. If this is the case, a valid User Code is  
required to disarm the system using method one. To  
enable method two, select Option 4 in Location 429  
(refer to Section 18.6 Consumer Options 2 on page 75).  
The indicators for any zones that are programmed to  
automatically isolate in STAY Mode 1 flash until Exit  
Time expires. At the end of Exit Time, the zone  
indicators turn off and the codepad sounds one short  
beep.  
Press and hold [STAY].  
When two beeps sound, release the button. The  
STAY indicator is extinguished and the system is  
disarmed.  
To arm the system from STAY Mode 2 (method  
two):  
1. Press and hold [STAY].  
2. When two beeps sound, release the button.  
The STAY indicator is lit and Exit Time starts.  
Single button disarming from STAY  
Mode 1 reports as User Code 16.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 4.0  
System Operations  
If the STAY indicator does not light and a long beep  
4.5  
Arming the System in STAY Mode 2  
sounds when attempting to arm the system, forced  
arming is not permitted. If this is the case, you must  
seal all zones or manually isolate them before you can  
arm the system.  
Use STAY Mode 2 to arm the perimeter and unused  
areas of the premises to detect an intruder, while at  
the same time being able to move freely within an  
automatically isolated area.  
4.6  
Disarming the System from STAY  
Mode 2  
You can program zones to automatically isolate in  
STAY Mode 2 using an Installer Code function (refer  
to Section 6.1.4 on page 30) or a Master Code function  
(Section 6.2.5 on page 35).  
There are two methods to disarm the system from  
STAY Mode 2. You can always use the first method.  
You can use the other method only if Option 4 is  
enabled in Location 429 (refer to Section 18.6  
Consumer Options 2 on page 75).  
Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode  
When arming the system in STAY Mode 2, you can  
use an optional entry timer called Entry Guard Timer  
for STAY Mode to delay the siren, strobe, and bell  
outputs if a zone that is not automatically isolated  
activates an alarm. Entry Guard Timer for STAY  
Mode is the delay time used for all zones, except 24-  
Hour zones, when the system is armed in STAY  
Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2.  
You cannot use method two unless both  
Options 2 and 4 are enabled in  
Location 429.  
To disarm the system from STAY Mode 2 (method  
one):  
If the Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode is  
programmed and a zone that was not automatically  
isolated is activated, the codepad beeps twice per sec  
until the Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode expires  
or the system is disarmed. If the alarm is not reset  
before Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode expires,  
the strobe, bell, and siren outputs are activated into  
alarm.  
Enter your code and press [STAY].  
Two beeps sound and the STAY indicator turns off.  
The system is now disarmed.  
To disarm the system from STAY Mode 2 (method  
two):  
A flashing zone indicator represents a previous alarm  
in that zone. If this is the case, a valid User Code is  
required to disarm the system using method one. To  
enable method two, select Option 4 in Location 429  
(refer to Section 18.6 Consumer Options 2 on page 75).  
Single button disarming from STAY  
Mode 2 reports as User Code 16.  
1. Press and hold [0].  
2. When two beeps sound, release the button.  
To arm the system in STAY Mode 2:  
1. Press and hold [0].  
2. When two beeps sound, release the button.  
The STAY indicator turns off and the system is  
disarmed.  
The STAY indicator lights and the Exit Time  
starts.  
Single button disarming from STAY  
Mode 2 reports as User Code16.  
The indicators for any zones programmed to  
automatically isolate in STAY Mode 2 flash until the  
Exit Time expires. At the end of Exit Time, the zone  
indicators turn off and the codepad sounds one short  
beep.  
If a zone is not sealed at the end of Exit Time, the  
zone is automatically isolated and lights constantly on  
the remote codepad. The zone becomes an active  
part of the system again after it is resealed. For  
example, if a window is open when Exit Time  
expires, the window does not become an active part  
of the system until it is closed. Opening the window  
after Exit Time expires causes an alarm.  
Forced Arming  
Arming the system when a zone is not sealed is  
known as forced arming. Refer to Section 14.3.6 Zone  
Options 2 on page 58 to enable forced arming for each  
zone.  
20  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 4.0 System Operations  
4.7  
Codepad Duress Alarm  
4.9  
Codepad Fire Alarm  
An audible codepad Fire Alarm activates when a user  
presses [4] and [6] on the remote codepad  
simultaneously. A distinct fire sound is emitted  
through the horn speaker to indicate this type of  
alarm. The fire sound is different than the burglary  
sound.  
Figure 3: ICP-CP508W LED Codepad  
Showing Audible Alarm Buttons  
Select Option 2 in Location 425 to program the  
codepad Fire Alarm as silent (refer to Section 18.2  
System Options 2 on page 73). To disable the codepad  
Fire Alarm Report, program Locations 339 and 340  
to 0 (refer to Section 15.10 Codepad Fire Report on  
page 61). A codepad Fire Alarm transmits a Contact  
ID Event Code 110 to a base station receiver.  
4.10 Codepad Medical Alarm  
An audible codepad Medical Alarm activates when a  
user presses [7] and [9] simultaneously.  
Select Option 4 in Location 425 to program codepad  
Medical Alarm as silent (refer to Section 18.2 System  
Options 2 on page 73). To disable reporting of the  
codepad Medical Alarm Report, program Locations  
341 and 342 to 0 (refer to Section 15.11 Codepad  
Medical Report on page 62). A codepad Medical Alarm  
transmits a Contact ID Event Code 100 to a base  
station receiver.  
A codepad Duress Alarm is used as a silent holdup  
alarm when 9 is added to the end of a valid User  
Code used to disarm the system. If a User Code has a  
priority level that only allows arming, that User Code  
can transmit a Duress Alarm when the system is  
armed.  
4.11 Isolating Zones  
Isolating allows you to manually disable one or more  
zones before arming the system in AWAY Mode,  
STAY Mode 1, or STAY Mode 2. When a zone is  
isolated, access is allowed into that zone when the  
system is armed without activating an alarm.  
A Duress Alarm (Contact ID Event Code 121) is  
useful only if your system reports to a monitoring  
station or pocket pager because domestic reporting  
format cannot decipher the type of alarm that  
occurred. You can disable the codepad Duress Alarm  
Report by programming 0 in Location 336 (refer to  
Section 15.8 Codepad Duress Report on page 61). You  
can select Option 2 in Location 430 to use 3 instead  
of 9 to activate a Duress Alarm (refer to Section 18.7  
Consumer Options 3 on page 75).  
For example, you might want to isolate a zone before  
arming the system because a zone passive infrared  
(PIR) detector is activating false alarms or because  
you need to leave a pet inside a particular zone while  
you are away.  
You can isolate zones using one of two methods. One  
method requires a valid User Code and the other  
does not. The ability to isolate zones is determined by  
the priority level assigned to each User Code holder.  
Some User Code holders cannot isolate zones. Refer  
to Section 13.3 User Code Priority on page 52 for more  
information.  
4.8  
Codepad Panic Alarm  
An audible codepad Panic Alarm activates when a  
user presses either [1] and [3] or [STAY] and  
[AWAY] simultaneously.  
Select Option 1 in Location 425 to program the  
codepad Panic Alarm as silent (refer to Section 18.2  
System Options 2 on page 73). To disable the codepad  
Panic Alarm Report, program Locations 337 and 338  
to 0 (refer to Section 15.9 Codepad Panic Report on  
page 61). A codepad Panic Alarm transmits Contact  
ID Event Code 120 if the system reports to a base  
ation receiver.  
Zones manually isolated using this method transmit a  
Zone Bypass Report (Contact ID Event Code 570) for  
each isolated zone when the system is armed. A Zone  
Bypass Restore Report is transmitted when the  
system is disarmed.  
4.11.1 Standard Isolating  
Standard isolating allows any operator to isolate zones  
because no code is required.  
1. Press [STAY] twice.  
Three beeps sound.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 4.0  
System Operations  
2. Enter the number of the zone to isolate and press  
[STAY].  
The indicators for the selected zones continue to  
flash until the next time the system is disarmed.  
The indicator for the zone flashes.  
Example  
24-Hour zones are automatically isolated as soon  
as you press [STAY]. All other Burglary Zones  
are automatically isolated only after the system is  
armed.  
To manually isolate zones 1, 3, and 4, press:  
[STAY][User Code][STAY][1][STAY][3][STAY][4]  
[STAY][AWAY]  
4.12 Fault Analysis Mode  
3. Repeat Step 2 for each zone you want to isolate.  
Whenever a system fault occurs, the FAULT or  
MAINS indicator flashes and the codepad beeps once  
per minute.  
As each zone is selected to isolate, the  
corresponding zone indicator flashes. If  
you make a mistake, enter the incorrect  
zone number and press [STAY]. This  
zone is no longer selected to isolate and  
the zone indicator turns off.  
If the MAINS indicator flashes, the AC MAINS  
supply is disconnected from the control panel. Refer  
to AC MAINS Failure on page 24.  
To enter Fault Analysis Mode to determine a system  
fault other than the AC MAINS supply:  
1. Press and hold [5] until two beeps sound.  
4. Press [AWAY].  
Two beeps sound and the system returns to the  
disarmed state.  
The FAULT indicator remains lit and the STAY  
and AWAY indicators flash.  
The indicators for the selected zones continue to  
flash until the next time the system is disarmed.  
The lit zone indicators indicate the type of fault  
that occurred. Refer to Table 14.  
2. To exit from the Fault Analysis Mode, press  
[AWAY].  
Example  
To manually isolate zones 1, 3, and 4, press:  
[STAY][STAY][1][STAY][3][STAY][4][STAY]  
[AWAY]  
The STAY and AWAY indicators turn off and  
the FAULT indicator remains lit.  
4.11.2 Code to Isolate  
The code to isolate method permits only those User  
Code holders with a priority level that includes Code  
to Isolate. The standard isolating method is disabled  
for any User Code with this priority level.  
1. Press [STAY].  
2. Enter your code and press [STAY].  
Table 14: Fault Indicators  
Indicator  
Fault Description  
Low battery  
Date and time  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Three beeps sound and the STAY indicator  
flashes.  
Sensor watch  
Horn speaker disconnected  
Telephone line fault  
EEPROM fail  
AUX Power Supply fail  
Communications failure  
If you attempt to enter Isolating Mode with a  
User Code that is not set for Code to Isolate, the  
system ignores the attempt.  
3. Enter the number of the zone to isolate and press  
[STAY].  
4.13 Fault Descriptions  
The indicator for the zone flashes.  
1 – Low Battery  
24-Hour zones are automatically isolated as soon  
you press [STAY]. All other burglary zones are  
automatically isolated only after the system is  
armed.  
A low battery fault occurs when the battery supply  
voltage falls below 11.2 VDC or when a Dynamic  
Battery Test detects a low capacity battery. This fault  
clears after a successful Dynamic Battery Test. The  
system performs a Dynamic Battery Test every 4  
hours after power is connected to the control panel  
and every time the system is armed.  
4. Repeat Step 3 for each zone to isolate.  
As each zone is selected to isolate, the  
corresponding zone indicator flashes. If  
you make a mistake, enter the incorrect  
zone number and press [STAY]. This  
zone is no longer selected to isolate and  
the zone indicator turns off.  
When reporting to the base station receiver, the  
control panel sends a Battery Test Failure Report  
(Contact ID Event Code 309) to indicate the low  
battery fault.  
5. Press [AWAY].  
Two beeps sound and the system returns to the  
disarmed state.  
22  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 4.0 System Operations  
2 – Date and Time  
7 – AUX Power Supply Fail  
The date and time fault occurs every time power is  
removed from the control panel. This type of fault  
causes the FAULT indicator to flash only if the Auto  
Arming Time is programmed in Locations 414 to 417  
(refer to Section 17.12 Auto Arming Time on page 72). If  
this timer is not programmed, a date and time fault is  
indicated only when you enter Fault Analysis Mode.  
This fault clears after you program the date and time.  
Refer to Section 6.2.7 Setting the Date and Time on page  
36 for more information.  
This fault occurs when either the 1 A, 12 V  
accessories AUX power supply or the 1 A codepad  
AUX power supply fails. Ten sec after the AUX  
power supply fails, the control panel automatically  
sends a System Trouble code (Contact ID Event  
Code 300) to the base station receiver. Ten sec after  
the PTC is reset, the control panel sends a Trouble  
Restore Report.  
If both 1 A AUX power supplies fail, only  
one system Trouble Report is sent to the  
base station receiver. The Trouble  
Restore Report is sent only after both  
AUX power supplies are reset.  
3 – Sensor Watch  
A sensor watch fault occurs when one of the detection  
devices stops working or fails to detect movement  
during the programmed time period when the system  
is disarmed. The sensor watch fault clears after the  
registered zone is unsealed and resealed.  
8 – Communication Failure  
A communication failure fault is registered if calls to  
the primary and secondary telephone numbers for  
Receiver 1 or Receiver 2 are unsuccessful.  
To determine the zone that registered the sensor  
watch fault:  
To determine which receiver failed to report:  
1. In Fault Analysis Mode, press and hold [8].  
Two beeps sound.  
1. In Fault Analysis Mode, press and hold [5].  
The indicator for the faulted zone lights.  
2. Release the button.  
Program the Sensor Watch Time in Locations 408  
and 409 (refer to Section 17.7 Sensor Watch Time on  
page 71). To select the zones to be monitored for  
sensor watch, refer to Section 14.3.4 Zone Options 1 on  
page 57.  
2. Release the button.  
If Receiver 1 failed to report, the Zone 1  
indicator lights. If Receiver 2 failed to report, the  
Zone 2 indicator lights.  
If the primary and secondary telephone numbers for  
Receiver 1 or Receiver 2 are set up for base  
When reporting to the base station receiver, the  
control panel sends a Self Test Fail Report (Contact  
ID Event Code 307) to indicate the sensor watch  
fault.  
reporting, Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 can each try up  
to twelve calls, per event, to the base station receiver.  
If the primary and secondary telephone numbers are  
programmed for both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2, the  
two receivers together can try up to 24 calls if the  
event is programmed to report on both receivers.  
4 – Horn Speaker Monitor  
A horn speaker monitor fault occurs when the horn  
speaker is disconnected from the control panel. This  
fault clears when the horn speaker is reconnected. To  
enable monitoring of the horn speaker, select Option  
2 in Location 424 (refer to Section 18.1 System Options 1  
on page 73).  
The control panel tries to call the base station  
receiver up to six times using both the primary and  
secondary telephone numbers (three times if only the  
primary telephone number is programmed). If the  
control panel fails to communicate to the base station  
receiver, a communications fault occurs. The control  
panel waits 10 min before it tries to report to the base  
station receiver up to six more times. The  
communication fault resets after the next successful  
call.  
5 – Telephone Line Fault  
A telephone line fault occurs when the telephone line  
disconnects from the control panel for longer than 40  
sec. This fault can only occur if Option 1 is selected  
in Location 176 (refer to Section 11.11 Telephone Line  
Fault Options on page 49). The fault clears when the  
telephone line reconnects for longer than 40 sec.  
If Receiver 1 or Receiver 2 is programmed  
for domestic reporting, the control panel  
does not show a fault if it fails to report  
after calling six times.  
6 – EEPROM Fail  
An EEPROM Fail is registered when the control  
panel detects an internal checksum error. You must  
remove power to the control panel and reset the  
control panel to default values to clear this fault.  
If Option 1 in Location 145 is enabled  
(refer to Section 12.1 Dialer Options 1  
on page 50) and no telephone numbers  
are programmed, no fault occurs.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 5.0  
Remote Radio Transmitter Operations  
AC MAINS Failure  
5.1  
Indications from Remote Radio  
Transmitter Operations  
An AC MAINS supply failure automatically flashes  
the MAINS indicator. If the AC MAINS supply is  
disconnected continuously longer than 2 min, the  
remote codepad beeps the codepad buzzer once per  
minute. If the control panel is programmed to report  
an AC MAINS fail to a base station receiver, it sends  
an AC Fail Report (Contact ID Event Code 301).  
When using the two-channel or four-channel hand-  
held transmitter to operate the system, the horn  
speakers or the strobe can provide audible or visual  
indications, or both. These indications allow using the  
system from outside the premises with confidence.  
The installer can program audible and visual  
indication beeps by selecting Options 4 and 8 in  
Location 424 (refer to Section 18.1 System Options 1 on  
page 73).  
The MAINS indicator stops flashing when the AC  
MAINS supply is reconnected. When the AC MAINS  
supply is continuously connected for 2 min, the  
codepad stops the once per minute beep and the  
control panel sends an AC Fail Restore Report to the  
base station receiver.  
Table 15: Horn Speaker Indication Beeps for  
Remote Operations  
If the Enable AC Fail in 1 Hour option (1) is selected  
in Location 426 (refer to Section 18.3 System Options 3  
on page 74), the MAINS indicator flashes when the  
AC MAINS supply is disconnected, but does not  
activate the dialer or the codepad buzzer unless the  
AC MAINS supply is disconnected continuously for 1  
hour.  
No. of Beeps  
One  
Two  
System Status  
System disarmed  
System armed in AWAY Mode  
System armed in STAY Mode 1  
One two-tone beep  
Table 16: Strobe Indications for Remote  
Operations  
If the Ignore AC MAINS Fail option (2) is selected in  
Location 426 (refer to Section 18.3 System Options 3 on  
page 74), the codepad does not indicate when the AC  
MAINS supply fails, but the control panel still sends  
an AC Fail Report, if enabled.  
Strobe Duration  
3 sec  
System Status  
System disarmed  
6 sec  
6 sec  
System armed in AWAY Mode  
System armed in STAY Mode 1  
5.0 Remote Radio Transmitter  
Operations  
You can operate the ICP-CC404 Control Panel  
remotely using hand-held remote radio transmitters.  
You can use either a two-channel or a four-channel  
hand-held transmitter to operate the system.  
5.2  
Remote Radio User Code Priority  
Levels  
You can only program the remote radio hand-held  
transmitters to operate as User Codes 9 to 16. You  
can assign priority levels to each hand-held  
transmitter, for example, allowing the transmitter to  
arm the system only, or to arm and disarm the  
system. Refer to Section 13.3 User Code Priority on  
page 52 for more information.  
Both the two-channel and four-channel hand-held  
transmitters can remotely arm and disarm the system  
in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1, and can activate  
remote Panic Alarms. The four-channel hand-held  
transmitter can also operate the control panel’s  
programmable outputs to activate a garage door or  
outside lights, for example.  
Before a hand-held radio transmitter can operate the  
control panel, you must teach the transmitter’s radio  
code to the control panel. Refer to Section 5.3  
Changing or Deleting Remote Radio User Codes for more  
information.  
Before a hand-held radio transmitter can operate the  
control panel, you must teach the transmitter’s radio  
code to the control panel. Refer to Section 5.3  
Changing or Deleting Remote Radio User Codes for more  
information.  
5.3  
Changing or Deleting Remote Radio  
User Codes  
You can use up to eight remote radio hand-held  
transmitters (User Codes 9 to 16) to operate the  
system. Before the control panel accepts a signal from  
a remote radio hand-held transmitter, the control  
panel must learn the transmitter’s code.  
You can substitute the Installer Code for  
the Master Code to change or delete  
remote radio User Codes.  
24  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 5.0 Remote Radio Transmitter Operations  
To add or change a remote radio User Code:  
1. Enter the Master Code and press [1][AWAY].  
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash.  
2. Enter the user number (9 to 16) you want to add  
or change and press [AWAY].  
This function ends automatically if you do  
not press a button within 60 sec or if you  
press [AWAY].  
One long beep indicates that you  
selected an incorrect user number.  
Two beeps sound and the corresponding zone  
indicators light. Refer to Table 17.  
5.4  
Two-Channel Remote Radio Hand-  
Held Transmitter Operations  
Because all operations using the two-button remote  
radio hand-held transmitter are fixed after the control  
panel learns the transmitter’s code, no programming  
is required for the transmitter buttons.  
Table 17: Codepad Indicators for Remote  
Radio User Numbers  
Data  
Value  
9
Zone Indicators  
Figure 4: RE012/E: 2-Channel Keyfob  
Transmitter  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MAINS  
X
X
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
2
X
X
X
X
X
X
3. Press any of the [TRANSMIT] buttons on the  
hand-held transmitter to allow the control panel  
to learn transmitter’s ID code.  
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators turn off.  
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to add or change  
3
1 – Button 1: Arm or disarm in AWAY Mode  
2 – Button 2: Arm or disarm STAY Mode  
3 – Buttons 1 and 2: Press both buttons at the  
same time to activate Panic alarm.  
another remote radio User Code.  
5.4.1 Arming in AWAY Mode  
This function ends automatically if you do  
not press a button within 60 sec or if you  
press [AWAY].  
Press and hold the black button for 2 sec.  
Two beeps sound on the remote codepad and the  
AWAY indicator lights. Exit Time starts.  
One long beep indicates that the code  
already exists or you selected an  
incorrect user number.  
If horn speaker indication beeps are enabled, two  
beeps sound from the horn speaker. If strobe  
indications are enabled, the strobe flashes for 6 sec to  
indicate the system is armed.  
To delete a remote radio User Code:  
1. Enter the Master Code and press [1][AWAY].  
5.4.2 Disarming from AWAY Mode  
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash.  
2. Enter the user number (9 to 16) you want to  
delete and press [AWAY].  
Two beeps sound and the corresponding zone  
indicators light. Refer to Table 17.  
3. Press [STAY] to delete the User Code.  
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators turn off.  
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to delete another remote  
Press and hold either the black or green button for  
2 sec.  
Two beeps sound on the remote codepad and the  
AWAY indicator turns off.  
If horn speaker indication beeps are enabled, one  
beep sounds from the horn speaker. If strobe  
indications are enabled, the strobe flashes for 3 sec to  
indicate the system is disarmed.  
5.4.3 Arming in STAY Mode 1  
Press and hold the green button for 2 sec.  
Two beeps sound on the remote codepad and the  
STAY indicator lights. Exit Time starts.  
radio User Code.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 5.0  
Remote Radio Transmitter Operations  
If horn speaker indication beeps are enabled, one  
two-tone beep sounds from the horn speaker. If  
strobe indications are enabled, the strobe flashes for  
6 sec to indicate the system is armed.  
Figure 5: RE013/E: 4-Channel Keyfob  
Transmitter  
1
3
5.4.4 Disarming from STAY Mode 1  
Press and hold either the black or green button for  
2 sec.  
Two beeps sound on the remote codepad and the  
STAY indicator is extinguished.  
2
4
If horn speaker indication beeps are enabled, one  
beep sounds from the horn speaker. If strobe  
indications are enabled, the strobe flashes for 3 sec to  
indicate the system is disarmed.  
5.4.5 Panic Alarm  
Press and hold both the black and green buttons  
together for 2 sec.  
An audible Panic Alarm is initiated that activates the  
horn speaker, strobe, and internal sirens.  
1 – Button 1: Arm or disarm in AWAY Mode  
2 – Button 2: Arm or disarm in STAY Mode  
3 – Buttons 1 and 2: Press both buttons at the  
same time to activate Panic alarm.  
4 – Buttons 3 and 4: Your security company  
can program these buttons for optional  
operation, such as operating a garage  
door.  
If Option 1 is selected in Location 425  
(refer to Section 18.2 System Options 2  
on page 73), the remote radio Panic  
Alarm is also silent.  
5.5  
Four-Channel Remote Radio Hand-  
Held Transmitter Operations  
5.5.1 Arming in AWAY Mode  
Press and hold [AWAY] for 2 sec.  
Two beeps sound on the remote codepad and the  
AWAY indicator lights. Exit Time starts.  
Because all operations using the four-channel remote  
radio hand-held transmitter are fixed after the control  
panel learns the hand-held transmitter’s code, no  
programming is required for the transmitter buttons.  
You can use the DOOR and AUX buttons on the  
transmitter to operate the control panel’s  
If horn speaker indication beeps are enabled, two  
beeps sound from the horn speaker. If strobe  
indications are enabled, the strobe flashes for 6 sec to  
indicate the system is armed.  
programmable outputs (garage door or outside lights,  
for example).  
5.5.2 Disarming from AWAY Mode  
Press and hold either [AWAY] or [STAY] for 2 sec.  
Two beeps sound on the remote codepad and the  
AWAY indicator is extinguished.  
If horn speaker indication beeps are enabled, one  
beep sounds from the horn speaker. If strobe  
indications are enabled, the strobe flashes for 3 sec to  
indicate the system is disarmed.  
5.5.3 Arming in STAY Mode 1  
Press and hold STAY for 2 sec.  
Two beeps sound on the remote codepad and the  
STAY indicator lights. Exit Time starts.  
If horn speaker indication beeps are enabled, one  
two-tone beep sounds from the horn speaker. If  
strobe indications are enabled, the strobe flashes for  
6 sec to indicate the system is armed.  
5.5.4 Disarming from STAY Mode 1  
Press and hold [AWAY] or [STAY] for 2 sec.  
Two beeps sound on the remote codepad and the  
STAY indicator is extinguished.  
26  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 6.0 System Functions  
If horn speaker indication beeps are enabled, one  
beep sounds from the horn speaker. If strobe  
indications are enabled, the strobe flashes for 3 sec to  
indicate the system is disarmed.  
6.0 System Functions  
This section explains more advanced features, such as  
Installer Code, Master Code, and hold-down  
functions used for testing and regular maintenance of  
the system.  
5.5.5 Panic Alarm  
Press and hold both [AWAY] and [STAY] together  
for 2 sec.  
6.1  
Installer Code Functions  
An audible Panic Alarm is initiated that activates the  
horn speaker, strobe, and internal sirens.  
Installer Code functions allow the installer to perform  
various system tests and tasks without knowing a  
Master Code.  
If Option 1 is selected in Location 425  
(refer to Section 18.2 System Options 2  
on page 73), the remote radio Panic  
Alarm is also silent.  
To access the required Installer Code function, enter  
the Installer Code and corresponding function digit,  
and press [AWAY]. The Installer Code functions are  
listed in Table 19.  
5.5.6 Remote Outputs  
You can only access these functions when the system  
is disarmed.  
The [DOOR] and [AUX] buttons on the four-channel  
hand-held transmitter can operate two remote  
outputs. Only the installer can program these outputs.  
You can use the Output Event Types listed in  
Table 18. Refer Section 16.0 Programmable Outputs for  
more information.  
Table 19: Installer Code Functions  
Function  
Description  
0
1
Reserved  
Set the number of days until the first Test  
Table 18: Remote Output Event Types  
Report  
(Section 6.1.1)  
Output  
Event Type Description  
2
3
Change domestic telephone numbers  
(Section 6.1.2)  
Change the Telco arming or disarming  
sequence  
(Section 6.1.3 on page 28)  
Setting STAY Mode 2 zones  
(Section 6.1.4 on page 30)  
Satellite Siren (EDMSAT) Service Mode  
(Section 6.1.5 on page 30)  
Turn Telephone Monitor Mode on and off  
(Section 6.1.6 on page 31)  
Walk Test Mode  
(Section 6.1.7 on page 31)  
Event Memory Recall Mode  
(Section 6.1.8 on page 31)  
Reserved  
Page  
67  
67  
2,11  
2,12  
2,13  
Radio Control Output 1  
Radio Control Output 2  
Radio Control Output 1 – not  
armed in AWAY Mode  
Radio Control Output 2 – not  
armed in AWAY Mode  
68  
4
5
6
7
8
9
2,14  
68  
To turn Output 1 on:  
Press and hold [DOOR] for 2 sec.  
Output 1 turns on.  
To turn Output 1 off:  
Press and hold [DOOR] for 2 sec.  
Output 1 turns off.  
To turn Output 2 on:  
6.1.1 Set the Number of Days until the First Test  
Report  
Press and hold [AUX] for 2 sec.  
Output 2 turns on.  
This function determines when the system sends the  
first Test Report (Contact ID Event Code 602). If you  
do not use this Installer Code Function, the first Test  
Report is sent to the base station receiver after the  
repeat interval programmed in Location 366 (refer to  
Section 15.21 Test Reporting Time on page 63). If you  
want the system to send the first Test Report sooner  
than the repeat interval, use this function to set when  
the first Test Report is sent.  
To turn Output 2 off:  
Press and hold [AUX] for 2 sec.  
Output 2 turns off.  
All reset times for the [DOOR] and  
[AUX] buttons are referenced to  
Polarities 1 and 8. Reset times vary  
depending on the polarity used.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 6.0  
System Functions  
To set the first Test Report:  
Table 20: Domestic Dialing Digits  
1. Enter the Installer Code and press [1][AWAY].  
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash.  
2. Enter the number of days (1 to 15) until the first  
Test Report is sent and press [AWAY].  
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators turn off. The system returns to the  
disarmed state.  
Digit  
Required  
Number to  
Program  
Digit  
Required  
Number to  
Program  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
*
8
9
refer to 0  
* 1  
* 2  
* 3  
* 4  
#
Each time you enter Installer’s  
Programming Mode, the first Test Report  
time defaults to the repeat interval set in  
Location 366.  
4 sec pause  
break  
15  
* 5  
Example  
The number of days counts down by one  
at 2400 hours as set in Locations 901 to  
904 (refer to Section 17.15 System  
Time on page 72).  
If you want to program two separate telephone  
numbers (9672 1777 and 9672 1233), enter:  
[1 2 3 4 2][AWAY][9 6 7 2 1 7 7 7][STAY]  
[4 9 6 7 2 1 2 3 3][AWAY]  
Example  
You can suspend domestic dialing at any time (for  
example, you are moving house and do not want the  
system to continue calling your work place or mobile  
phone).  
If the repeat interval is set to 7 days, but you want the  
first Test Report to be sent in 2 days, enter:  
[1 2 3 4 1][AWAY][2][AWAY]  
6.1.2 Changing Domestic Phone Numbers  
To disable domestic dialing:  
When the system is set up for domestic dialing, this  
function allows the installer to view and program the  
telephone numbers that the system calls if an alarm  
occurs. Refer to Section 9.0 Domestic Dialing on  
page 40 for more information.  
Enter the Installer Code and press [2][AWAY]  
[STAY][4][AWAY].  
Table 21: Codepad Indicators When Changing  
Phone Numbers  
To change domestic phone numbers:  
1. Enter the Installer Code and press [2][AWAY].  
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash.  
Zone Indicators  
MAINS  
Indicator  
X
Digit  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
If there are telephone numbers programmed,  
they appear one digit at a time using the remote  
codepad indicators. Refer to Table 21 on page 28  
for the indicators and their meanings.  
X
X
X
X
If there are no telephone numbers programmed,  
an additional two beeps sound after entering this  
mode. These two beeps normally sound after you  
enter the last digit of the last phone number.  
X
X
X
8
9
X
X
2. Enter the first phone number.  
Each digit appears as you enter it.  
3. If you are programming another phone number,  
press [STAY][4] to separate the end of one phone  
number and the beginning of the next.  
X
X
11  
12  
Pause  
Break  
15  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
If you are not programming other numbers, go to  
Step 5.  
X
6.1.3 Change Telco Arming or Disarming  
Sequence  
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to program another phone  
number.  
5. Press [AWAY] to exit from this mode.  
Program the call forward sequence to automatically  
operate when you arm the system in AWAY Mode.  
This feature is only available if the call forward option  
is available from your telecommunication provider.  
28  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 6.0 System Functions  
When arming the system in AWAY Mode, the  
control panel automatically dials the  
telecommunication exchange to redirect all calls to  
your mobile phone, pocket pager, or answering  
service. When activated, your telephone still allows  
outgoing calls.  
If a call forwarding sequence is already  
programmed, the sequence appears one digit at a  
time using the remote codepad indicators. Refer  
to Table 23 on page 29 for the indicators and their  
meanings.  
If there is no call forward sequence programmed,  
an additional two beeps sound after entering this  
mode. These two beeps normally sound after the  
last digit of the call forward sequence is  
displayed.  
Contact your telecommunications provider for more  
information on call forward operations.  
Table 22: Telco Arming or Disarming Dialing  
Digits  
3. Press [STAY][1 6 1] and enter the phone number  
to which you want calls from the control panel  
diverted.  
Digit  
Required  
Number to  
Program  
Digit  
Required  
Number to  
Program  
4. Press [STAY][2][AWAY].  
Two beeps sound and the system returns to the  
disarmed state.  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
8
9
Example  
refer to 0  
* 1  
* 2  
* 3  
* 4  
* 5  
If you want to automatically divert all unanswered  
incoming calls to another telephone number (for  
example, 9672 1777) when the system is armed in  
AWAY Mode, enter:  
12  
4 sec pause  
break  
15  
[1 2 3 4 3][AWAY][1][AWAY][STAY]  
[1 6 1 9 6 7 2 1 7 7 7][STAY][2][AWAY]  
Table 23: Codepad Indicators When Changing  
the Telco Arming or Disarming  
Sequence  
You can suspend the Telco arming sequence at any  
time.  
To disable the Telco arming sequence:  
Enter the Installer Code and press [3][AWAY][1]  
[AWAY][STAY][4][AWAY].  
Zone Indicators  
MAINS  
Indicator  
X
Digit  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
To program the Telco disarming sequence – easy  
call forward (no answer off):  
X
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
X
1. Enter the Installer Code and press [3][AWAY].  
X
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash.  
2. Press [2][AWAY] to change the Telco disarming  
sequence.  
X
X
X
X
Three beeps sound.  
X
X
If a Telco disarming sequence is already  
programmed, the sequence appears one digit at a  
time using the remote codepad indicators. Refer  
to Table 23 on page 29 for the indicators and their  
meanings.  
X
X
11  
12  
Pause  
Break  
15  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
If there is no Telco disarming sequence  
programmed, an additional two beeps sound after  
entering this mode. These two beeps normally  
sound after the last digit of the sequence is  
shown.  
X
To program the Telco arming sequence – easy  
call forward (no answer on):  
1. Enter the Installer Code and press [3][AWAY].  
3. Press [STAY][2 6 1][STAY][2][AWAY].  
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash.  
Two beeps sound and the system returns to the  
disarmed state.  
2. Press [1][AWAY] to change the Telco arming  
sequence. Three beeps sound.  
You can suspend the Telco disarming sequence at  
any time.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 6.0  
System Functions  
To disable the Telco disarming sequence:  
3. Press [STAY][2 2 1][STAY][2][AWAY].  
Two beeps sound and the system returns to the  
disarmed state.  
Enter the Installer Code and press [3][AWAY][2]  
[AWAY][STAY][4][AWAY].  
You can suspend the Telco disarming sequence at  
any time.  
To program the Telco arming sequence – easy  
call forward (immediate on):  
1. Enter the Installer Code and press [3][AWAY].  
To disable the Telco disarming sequence:  
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash.  
Enter the Installer Code and press [3][AWAY][2]  
[AWAY][STAY][4][AWAY].  
2. Press [1][AWAY] button to change the Telco  
arming sequence. Three beeps sound.  
6.1.4 Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones  
This function allows the installer to select the zones  
that are automatically isolated when the system is  
armed in STAY Mode 2.  
If a call forwarding sequence is already  
programmed, the sequence appears one digit at a  
time using the remote codepad indicators. Refer  
to Table 23 on page 29 for the indicators and their  
meanings.  
To arm the system in STAY Mode 2, press and hold  
[0] until two beeps sound.  
Refer to Section 6.3.3 on page 37 or Section 4.5 Arming  
the System in STAY Mode 2 on page 17 for more  
information.  
If there is no call forward sequence programmed,  
an additional two beeps sound after entering this  
mode. These two beeps normally sound after the  
last digit of the call forward sequence is shown.  
To set STAY Mode 2 zones:  
3. Press [STAY][1 2 1] and enter the phone number  
to which you want calls from the control panel  
diverted.  
1. Enter the Installer Code and press [4][AWAY].  
Three beeps sound and the STAY indicator  
flashes.  
2. Enter the number of the zone you want to  
automatically isolate and press [STAY].  
The corresponding zone indicator flashes.  
3. Repeat Step 2 for each zone you want to select.  
4. Press [STAY][2][AWAY].  
Two beeps sound and the system returns to the  
disarmed state.  
Example  
If you want to automatically divert all incoming calls  
to another telephone number (for example, 9672  
1777) when the system is armed in AWAY Mode,  
enter:  
As you select each zone to isolate, the  
corresponding zone indicator flashes. If  
you make a mistake, enter the incorrect  
zone number and press [STAY]. This  
zone is no longer selected to isolate and  
the zone indicator turns off.  
[1 2 3 4 3][AWAY][1][AWAY][STAY]  
[1 2 1 9 6 7 2 1 7 7 7][STAY][2][AWAY]  
You can suspend the Telco arming sequence at any  
time.  
4. Press [AWAY].  
Two beeps sound and the system returns to the  
disarmed state.  
To disable the Telco arming sequence:  
The indicators for the zones you selected and the  
STAY indicator turn off.  
Enter the Installer Code and press [3][AWAY][1]  
[AWAY][STAY][4][AWAY].  
Example  
To program the Telco disarming sequence – easy  
call forward (immediate off):  
1. Enter the Installer Code and press [3][AWAY].  
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash.  
2. Press [2][AWAY] to change the Telco disarming  
sequence.  
If you want to select zones 2, 5, and 6, enter:  
[1 2 3 4 4][AWAY][2][STAY][5][STAY][6][STAY]  
[AWAY]  
You can disable all zones selected to automatically  
isolate for STAY Mode 2 at any time.  
To disable STAY Mode 2 zones:  
Three beeps sound.  
Enter the Installer Code and press [4][AWAY]  
[AWAY].  
If a Telco disarming sequence is already  
programmed, the sequence appears one digit at a  
time using the remote codepad indicators. Refer  
to Table 23 for the indicators and their meanings.  
6.1.5 Satellite Siren Service Mode  
If the SS914 Satellite Siren (EDMSAT) is connected  
to Output 1, this function allows you to perform  
service work on the system without activating the  
satellite siren. The satellite siren returns to its normal  
working state the next time the system is armed.  
If there is no Telco disarming sequence  
programmed, an additional two beeps sound after  
entering this mode. These two beeps normally  
sound after the last digit of the sequence appears.  
30  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 6.0 System Functions  
To enter Satellite Siren Service Mode:  
Enter the Installer Code and press [5][AWAY].  
Three beeps sound.  
3. Press [AWAY] to exit from this function.  
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators turn off. The system returns to the  
disarmed state.  
6.1.6 Turning Telephone Monitor Mode On and  
Off  
6.1.8 Event Memory Recall Mode  
This function allows you to play back the last 40  
system events that occurred. Event Memory Recall  
Mode reports all alarms and each arming or  
disarming of the system and helps with  
troubleshooting system faults. The events are shown  
using the codepad indicators.  
Telephone Monitor Mode allows you to use the  
remote codepad for visual representation of data  
transmissions between the control panel and the base  
station receiver. The dialing sequence is also shown in  
this mode.  
The codepad beeps once every 2 sec when  
Telephone Monitor Mode is active, whether the  
system is in Installer’s Programming Mode or normal  
operating mode. The first five indicators show the  
progressive steps during a transmission to the base  
station receiver.  
To enter Event Memory Recall Mode:  
Enter the Installer Code and press [8][AWAY].  
Three beeps sound. The events are played back by  
the codepad indicators in reverse chronological order.  
Example  
If the events occurred in the following order:  
1. System armed in AWAY Mode  
2. Alarm in Zone 3  
Table 24: Telephone Monitor Mode Indications  
Zone LED  
Dialing Event  
3. Alarm in Zone 4  
1
2
3
4
5
None  
Telephone line seized  
Dialing phone number  
Handshake received  
Data being transmitted  
Kiss-off received  
4. System disarmed  
The alarm memory plays back in this order:  
1. All indicators off except MAINS (System  
disarmed)  
2. Zone 4 and AWAY indicators light (Alarm in  
Telephone line released  
Zone 4)  
3. Zone 3 and AWAY indicators light (Alarm in  
To turn Telephone Monitor Mode on:  
Enter the Installer Code and press [6][AWAY].  
Three beeps sound.  
Zone 3)  
4. AWAY indicator lights (System armed in AWAY  
Mode)  
To turn Telephone Monitor Mode off:  
Enter the Installer Code and press [6][AWAY].  
Two beeps sound.  
Each event is indicated by a beep and a lit indicator.  
Resetting a disarmed 24-Hour Alarm is indicated by a  
beep only.  
After the last event, three beeps sound to indicate the  
end of playback. You can stop the replay at any time  
by pressing [AWAY].  
You must exit from Telephone Monitor  
Mode to resume normal operations.  
If the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or  
STAY Mode 2, the STAY indicator shows  
the event memory playback. There is no  
differentiation between STAY Mode 1 and  
STAY Mode 2.  
6.1.7 Walk Test Mode  
Walk Test Mode allows you to test detection devices  
to ensure they are functioning correctly. Before  
activating Walk Test Mode, isolate any zones that are  
not required for testing. Refer to Section 4.11 Isolating  
Zones on page 21 for more information.  
If power is removed from the control  
panel, the memory of all events is saved.  
To enter Walk Test Mode:  
1. Enter the Installer Code and press [7][AWAY].  
6.2  
Master Code Functions  
Master Code Functions allow users with the  
appropriate priority level to perform certain  
supervisory level functions. You can use these  
functions only when the system is disarmed.  
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash. The codepad beeps once per sec  
when Walk Test Mode is active.  
2. Unseal and seal the zones to be tested.  
The codepad sounds one long beep and the horn  
speaker sounds one short beep each time a zone  
is sealed or unsealed.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 6.0  
System Functions  
Example  
The default Master Code is 2580 and is  
User Code 1. You can program multiple  
Master Codes. Refer to Section 13.3  
User Code Priority on page 52 for more  
information.  
To program User Code number 2 as 4627, enter:  
[2 5 8 0 1][AWAY][2][AWAY][4 6 2 7][AWAY]  
To delete a User Code:  
1. Enter your Master Code and press [1][AWAY].  
To access a Master Code function, enter the Master  
Code and press the corresponding function digit and  
the [AWAY] button. The Master Code functions are  
listed in Table 25.  
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash.  
2. Enter the number of the code (1 to 8) you want to  
delete and press [AWAY].  
Two beeps sound and the corresponding zone  
indicator lights.  
Table 25: Master Code Functions  
3. Press [STAY] to delete the User Code.  
Function  
Description  
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators turn off.  
4. Repeat this procedure to delete other User  
Codes.  
0
1
Reserved  
Add, change, and delete User  
Codes/Remote Radio User Codes  
(Sections 6.2.1 on page 32 and 6.2.2 on  
page 32)  
Change domestic phone numbers  
(Section 6.2.3 on page 33)  
Change Telco Arm or Disarm Sequence  
(Section 6.2.4 on page 34)  
Set zones for STAY Mode 2  
(Section 6.2.5 on page 35)  
Turn outputs on and off  
(Section 6.2.6 on page 36)  
Set the date and time  
(Section 6.2.7 on page 36)  
Walk Test Mode  
(Section 6.2.8 on page 36)  
Event Memory Recall Mode  
(Section 6.2.9 on page 36)  
This function ends automatically if you do  
not press a button within 60 sec or if you  
press [AWAY].  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
One long beep indicates that the code  
already exists or that you entered an  
incorrect user number.  
Example  
To delete user code number 3, enter:  
[2 5 8 0 1][AWAY][3][AWAY][STAY]  
6.2.2 Changing and Deleting Remote Radio User  
Codes  
This function allows a Master Code holder to change  
or delete a remote radio User Code.  
Reserved  
To add or change a remote radio User Code:  
1. Enter your Master Code and press [1][AWAY].  
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash.  
2. Enter the number of the code (9 to 16) you want  
to change and press [AWAY].  
6.2.1 Changing and Deleting User Codes  
This function allows a Master Code holder to change  
or delete a User Code.  
1. Enter your Master Code and press [1][AWAY].  
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash.  
Two beeps sound and the corresponding codepad  
indicators light. Refer to Table 26.  
2. Enter the number of the code (1 to 8) you want to  
change and press [AWAY].  
Two beeps sound and the corresponding zone  
indicator lights.  
3. Enter the new code and press [AWAY].  
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators turn off.  
Table 26: Remote Radio Numbers Displayed by  
the Codepad Indicators  
User  
No  
9
Zone Indicators  
MAINS  
Indicator  
4. Repeat this procedure to change other User  
Codes.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
X
X
This function ends automatically if you do  
not press a button within 60 sec or if you  
press [AWAY].  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
One long beep indicates that the code  
already exists or that you entered an  
incorrect user number.  
X
X
X
32  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 6.0 System Functions  
3. Press any of the [TRANSMIT] buttons on the  
hand-held transmitter.  
Table 27: Codepad Indicators When Changing  
Domestic Telephone Numbers  
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators turn off.  
Zone Indicators  
MAINS  
Indicator  
X
4. Repeat this procedure to change other remote  
radio User Codes.  
Digit  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
This function ends automatically if you do  
not press a button within 60 sec or if you  
press [AWAY].  
X
X
X
One long beep indicates that the code  
already exists or that you entered an  
incorrect user number.  
4
5
6
X
X
X
7
8
9
*
X
To delete a remote radio User Code:  
1. Enter your Master Code and press [1][AWAY].  
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash.  
2. Enter the number of the code (9 to 16) you want  
to delete and press [AWAY].  
Two beeps sound and the corresponding codepad  
indicators light. Refer to Table 26.  
3. Press [STAY] to delete the User Code.  
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators turn off.  
4. Repeat this procedure to delete other remote  
radio User Codes.  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
#
Pause  
Break  
X
X
X
2. Enter the first phone number.  
The indicator for each digit lights as you enter it.  
3. If you are programming another phone number,  
press [STAY][4] to separate the end of one phone  
number and the beginning of the next.  
If you are not programming other numbers, go to  
Step 5.  
This function ends automatically if you do  
not press a button within 60 sec or if you  
press [AWAY].  
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to program another phone  
number.  
5. Press [AWAY] to exit from this mode.  
One long beep indicates that the code  
already exists or that you entered an  
incorrect user number.  
Table 28: Domestic Dialing Digits  
Digit  
Required  
Number to  
Program  
Digit  
Required  
Number to  
Program  
6.2.3 Changing Domestic Phone Numbers  
When the system is set up for domestic dialing, this  
function allows the installer to view and program the  
telephone numbers that the system calls if an alarm  
occurs. Refer to Section 9.0 Domestic Dialing on  
page 40 for more information.  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
*
7
8
9
* 1  
* 2  
* 3  
* 4  
#
To change domestic phone numbers:  
1. Enter your Master Code and press [2][AWAY].  
4 sec pause  
break  
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash.  
Example  
If you want to program two separate telephone  
numbers (9672 1777 and 9672 1233), enter:  
If there are telephone numbers programmed,  
they appear one digit at a time using the remote  
codepad indicators. Refer to Table 27 for the  
indicators and their meanings.  
[2 5 8 0 2][AWAY][9 6 7 2 1 7 7 7][STAY]  
[4 9 6 7 2 1 2 3 3][[AWAY]  
If there are no telephone numbers programmed,  
an additional two beeps sound after entering this  
mode. These two beeps normally sound after you  
enter the last digit of the last phone number.  
To disable domestic dialing:  
Enter your Master Code and press [2][AWAY]  
[STAY][4][AWAY].  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 6.0  
System Functions  
6.2.4 Change Telco Arming or Disarming  
Sequence  
Table 30: Codepad Indicators When Changing  
Telco Arming or Disarming  
Sequence  
Program the call forward sequence to automatically  
operate when you arm the system in AWAY Mode.  
This feature is only available if the call forward option  
is available from your telecommunication provider.  
Zone Indicators  
MAINS  
Indicator  
X
Digit  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
When arming the system in AWAY Mode, the  
control panel dials the telecommunication exchange  
to redirect all calls to your mobile phone, pocket  
pager, or answering service. When activated, your  
telephone still allows outgoing calls.  
0
1
X
2
X
3
X
4
X
Contact your telecommunications provider for more  
information on call forward operations.  
5
X
6
X
7
8
9
X
Table 29: Telco Arming or Disarming Dialing  
Digits  
X
X
X
X
11  
12  
Pause  
Break  
15  
X
X
X
X
X
Digit  
Required  
Number to  
Program  
Digit  
Required  
Number to  
Program  
X
X
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
8
9
0
* 1  
* 2  
* 3  
* 4  
* 5  
X
X
3. Press [STAY][1 6 1] and enter the phone number  
to which you want calls from the control panel  
diverted.  
12  
4 sec pause  
break  
15  
4. Press [STAY][2][AWAY].  
Two beeps sound and the system returns to the  
disarmed state.  
To program the Telco arming sequence – easy  
call forward (no answer on):  
1. Enter your Master Code and press [3][AWAY].  
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash.  
2. Press [1][AWAY] to change the Telco arming  
sequence.  
Example  
If you want to automatically divert all unanswered  
incoming calls to another telephone number (for  
example, 9672 1777) when the system is armed in  
AWAY Mode, enter:  
[2 5 8 0 3][AWAY][1][AWAY][STAY]  
[1 6 1 9 6 7 2 1 7 7 7][STAY][2][AWAY]  
Three beeps sound.  
You can suspend the Telco arming sequence at any  
time.  
If a call forwarding sequence is already  
programmed, the sequence appears one digit at a  
time using the remote codepad indicators. Refer  
to Table 30 for the indicators and their meanings.  
To disable the Telco arming sequence:  
Enter your Master Code and press [3][AWAY][1]  
[AWAY][STAY][4][AWAY].  
If there is no call forward sequence programmed,  
an additional two beeps sound after entering this  
mode. These two beeps normally sound after the  
last digit of the call forward sequence is  
displayed.  
To program the Telco disarming sequence – easy  
call forward (no answer off):  
1. Enter your Master Code and press [3][AWAY].  
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash.  
2. Press [2][AWAY] to change the Telco disarming  
sequence.  
Three beeps sound.  
If a Telco disarming sequence is already  
programmed, the sequence appears one digit at a  
time using the remote codepad indicators. Refer  
to Table 30 for the indicators and their meanings.  
34  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 6.0 System Functions  
If there is no Telco disarming sequence  
programmed, an additional two beeps sound after  
entering this mode. These two beeps normally  
sound after the last digit of the sequence is  
shown.  
2. Press [2][AWAY] to change the Telco disarming  
sequence.  
Three beeps sound.  
If a Telco disarming sequence is already  
programmed, the sequence appears one digit at a  
time using the remote codepad indicators. Refer  
to Table 30 on page 34 for the indicators and their  
meanings.  
3. Press [STAY][2 6 1][STAY][2][AWAY].  
Two beeps sound and the system returns to the  
disarmed state.  
You can suspend the Telco disarming sequence at  
any time.  
If there is no Telco disarming sequence  
programmed, an additional two beeps sound after  
entering this mode. These two beeps normally  
sound after the last digit of the sequence is  
shown.  
To disable the Telco disarming sequence:  
Enter your Master Code and press [3][AWAY][2]  
[AWAY][STAY][4][AWAY].  
3. Press [STAY][2 2 1][STAY][2][AWAY].  
To program the Telco arming sequence – easy  
call forward (immediate on):  
1. Enter your Master Code and press [3][AWAY].  
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash.  
2. Press [1][AWAY] button to change the Telco  
arming sequence. Three beeps sound.  
Two beeps sound and the system returns to the  
disarmed state.  
You can suspend the Telco disarming sequence at  
any time.  
To disable the Telco disarming sequence:  
Enter your Master Code and press [3][AWAY][2]  
[AWAY][STAY][4][AWAY].  
If a call forwarding sequence is already  
programmed, the sequence appears one digit at a  
time using the remote codepad indicators. Refer  
to Table 30 for the indicators and their meanings.  
6.2.5 Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones  
This function allows the Master Code holder to select  
the zones that are automatically isolated when the  
system is armed in STAY Mode 2.  
If there is no call forward sequence programmed,  
an additional two beeps sound after entering this  
mode. These two beeps normally sound after the  
last digit of the call forward sequence is  
displayed.  
To arm the system in STAY Mode 2, press and hold  
[0] until two beeps sound. Refer to Section 6.3.3 on  
page 37 or Section 4.5 Arming the System in STAY Mode  
2 on page 20 for more information.  
3. Press [STAY][1 2 1] and enter the phone number  
to which you want calls from the control panel  
diverted.  
To set STAY Mode 2 zones:  
1. Enter your Master Code and press [4][AWAY].  
Three beeps sound and the STAY indicator  
flashes.  
2. Enter the number of the zone you want to  
automatically isolate and press [STAY].  
The corresponding zone indicator flashes.  
3. Repeat Step 2 to select each zone.  
4. Press [STAY][2][AWAY].  
Two beeps sound and the system returns to the  
disarmed state.  
Example  
If you want to automatically divert all incoming calls  
to another telephone number (for example, 9672  
1777) when the system is armed in AWAY Mode,  
enter:  
As you select each zone to isolate, the  
corresponding zone indicator flashes. If  
you make a mistake, enter the incorrect  
zone number and press [STAY]. This  
zone is no longer selected to be isolated  
and the zone indicator is extinguished.  
[2 5 8 0 3][AWAY][1][AWAY][STAY]  
[1 2 1 9 6 7 2 1 7 7 7][STAY][2][AWAY]  
You can suspend the Telco arming sequence at any  
time.  
4. Press [AWAY].  
To disable the Telco arming sequence:  
Two beeps sound and the system returns to the  
disarmed state.  
The indicators for the zones you selected and the  
STAY indicator turn off.  
Enter your Master Code and press [3][AWAY][1]  
[AWAY][STAY][4][AWAY].  
To program the Telco disarming sequence – easy  
call forward (immediate off):  
1. Enter your Master Code and press [3][AWAY].  
Example  
If you want to select zones 2, 5, and 6, enter:  
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash.  
[2 5 8 0 4][AWAY][2][STAY][5][STAY][6][STAY]  
[AWAY]  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 6.0  
System Functions  
You can disable all zones selected to automatically  
isolate for STAY Mode 2 at any time.  
6.2.7 Setting the Date and Time  
Use this function to change the date and time or if  
power was removed from the system.  
To disable STAY Mode 2 zones:  
Enter your Master Code and press [4][AWAY]  
[AWAY].  
If the date and time are not set, the date and time  
fault is shown only when the Auto Arming Time is  
programmed in Locations 414 to 417 (refer to Section  
17.12 Auto Arming Time on page 72), or when you  
enter Fault Analysis Mode by holding down [5].  
6.2.6 Turning Outputs On/Off  
If an output is programmed for remote operation, you  
can turn the remote output on or off using this Master  
Code function or remotely using the Alarm Link  
Software.  
To set the new date and time:  
1. Enter your Master Code and press [6][AWAY].  
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash.  
2. Enter the day, month, year, hour, and minute in  
DD, MM, YY, HH, MM format (where DD is the  
day of the month, MM is the month of the year,  
YY is the year, HH is the hour of the day, and  
MM minute of the day) and press [AWAY].  
To use this Master Code function, you must program  
one or more of the outputs with these Output Event  
Types:  
Output 1 = Output Event Type 2,8 (page 67)  
Output 2 = Output Event Type 2,9 (page 67)  
Output 3 = Output Event Type 2,10 (page 67)  
Use 24:00 hour format when programming the  
hour of the day.  
To turn an output on from the remote codepad:  
1. Enter your Master Code and press [5][AWAY].  
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash.  
2. Enter the number of the output (1 to 3) and press  
[AWAY].  
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators turn off. If a long beep sounds, there  
was an error when you entered the date and time.  
Example  
To set the date and time for the 1st January 20064 at  
10:30 PM, enter:  
Three beeps sound and the output turns on.  
3. Repeat Step 2 to turn on another output.  
4. Press [AWAY] to exit from this function.  
[2 5 8 0 6][AWAY][0 1 0 1 0 6 2 2 3 0][AWAY]  
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators turn off.  
6.2.8 Walk Test Mode  
Walk Test Mode allows you to test detection devices  
to ensure they are functioning correctly. Before  
activating Walk Test Mode, isolate any zones that are  
not required for testing. Refer to Section 4.11 Isolating  
Zones on page 21 for more information.  
Example  
If Output 2 is programmed as 291000 in Locations  
374 to 379, the Master Code holder can turn on this  
output by entering:  
To enter Walk Test Mode:  
[2 5 8 0 5][AWAY][2][AWAY][AWAY]  
1. Enter your Master Code and press [7][AWAY].  
To turn off an output from the remote codepad:  
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash. The codepad beeps once per sec  
when Walk Test Mode is active.  
1. Enter your Master Code and press [5][AWAY].  
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash.  
2. Enter the number of the output (1 to 3) and press  
[STAY].  
Two beeps sound and the output turns off.  
3. Repeat Step 2 to turn off another output.  
4. Press [AWAY] button to exit from this function.  
2. Unseal and seal the zones to be tested.  
The codepad sounds one long beep and the horn  
speaker sounds one short beep each time a zone  
is sealed or unsealed.  
3. Press [AWAY] to exit from this function.  
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators turn off. The system returns to the  
disarmed state.  
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators turn off.  
Example  
6.2.9 Event Memory Recall Mode  
If Output 2 is programmed as 291000 in Locations  
374 to 379, the Master Code holder can turn off this  
output by entering:  
Event Memory Recall Mode allows you to play back  
the last forty system events. Event Memory Recall  
Mode shows all alarms and each arming or disarming  
of the system and helps with troubleshooting system  
faults. The events are shown using the codepad  
indicators.  
[2 5 8 0 5][AWAY][2][STAY][AWAY]  
36  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 6.0 System Functions  
To enter Event Memory Recall Mode:  
If there was no alarm during the armed cycle,  
pressing and holding [*] a second time disarms the  
system from STAY Mode 1. To enable single button  
disarming from STAY Mode 1 using this function,  
select Option 4 in Location 429.  
Enter your Master Code and press [8][AWAY].  
Three beeps sound. The events are played back by  
the codepad indicators in reverse chronological order.  
Example  
If an alarm occurred or entry warning was activated,  
a valid User Code is required to disarm the system.  
If the events occurred in the following order:  
1. System armed in AWAY Mode  
2. Alarm in Zone 3  
3. Alarm in Zone 4  
4. System disarmed  
Refer to Section 14.3.6 Zone Options 2 on page 58 for  
information on programming each zone to  
automatically isolate in STAY Mode 1.  
6.3.3 Arming the System in STAY Mode 2  
The alarm memory plays back in this order:  
1. All indicators off except MAINS (System  
Pressing and holding [0] until two beeps sound arms  
the system in STAY Mode 2. This function operates  
only if you select Option 2 in Location 429 (refer to  
Section 18.6 Consumer Options 2 on page 75).  
disarmed)  
2. Zone 4 and AWAY indicators light (Alarm in  
Zone 4)  
If there was no alarm during the armed cycle,  
pressing and holding [0] a second time disarms the  
system from STAY Mode 2. To enable single button  
disarming from STAY Mode 2 using this function,  
select Option 4 in Location 429.  
3. Zone 3 and AWAY indicators light (Alarm in  
Zone 3)  
4. AWAY indicator lights (System armed in AWAY  
Mode)  
Each event is indicated by a beep and a lit indicator.  
Resetting a disarmed 24-Hour Alarm is indicated by a  
beep only.  
If an alarm occurred or entry warning was activated,  
a valid User Code is required to disarm the system.  
For more information, refer to Section 6.1.4 Setting  
STAY Mode 2 Zones on page 30 (using the Installer  
Code function) or Section 6.2.5 Setting STAY Mode 2  
Zones on page 35 (using the Master Code function).  
After the last event, three beeps sound to indicate the  
end of playback. You can stop the replay at any time  
by pressing [AWAY].  
If the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or  
STAY Mode 2, the STAY indicator shows  
the event memory playback. There is no  
differentiation between STAY Mode 1 and  
STAY Mode 2.  
6.3.4 Horn Speaker Test  
Pressing and holding [1] until two beeps sound  
activates the horn speaker for a two-sec burst. No  
other sounding device operates during this mode.  
6.3.5 Bell Test  
If the control panel is powered down, the  
memory of all events is lost.  
Pressing and holding [2] until two beeps sound  
activates the internal screamers for a two-sec burst.  
No other sounding device operates during this mode.  
6.3  
Hold-Down Functions  
If the SS914 Satellite Siren (EDMSAT) is connected  
to the control panel, this function tests both the horn  
speaker and the strobe connected to the satellite siren  
for a 2-sec burst.  
Hold-down functions allow easy activation of specific  
operations. When you press and hold a button for  
2 sec, two beeps sound and the corresponding  
function operates. The hold-down functions are listed  
below.  
6.3.6 Strobe Test  
6.3.1 Arming the System in AWAY Mode  
Pressing and holding [3] operates the strobe. No other  
device operates during this mode.  
Pressing and holding [#] until two beeps sound arms  
the system in AWAY Mode. This function operates  
only if you select Option 2 in Location 429 (refer to  
Section 18.6 Consumer Options 2 on page 75).  
If the SS914 Satellite Siren (EDMSAT) is connected  
to the control panel, this function also tests the strobe  
on the satellite siren.  
6.3.2 Arming the System in STAY Mode 1  
To turn the strobe test on:  
Press and hold [3] until three beeps sound.  
The strobe flashes.  
Pressing and holding [*] until two beeps sound arms  
the system in STAY Mode 1. This function operates  
only if you select Option 2 in Location 429 (refer to  
Section 18.6 Consumer Options 2 on page 75).  
To turn the strobe test off:  
Press and hold [3] until two beeps sound.  
The strobe stops flashing.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 7.0  
Remote Arming by Telephone  
6.3.7 Turning Day Alarm On and Off  
6.3.11 Codepad Buzzer Tone Change  
Pressing and holding [4] turns Day Alarm on or off. If  
you want the STAY indicator to indicate the status of  
Day Alarm operation (enabled or disabled), select  
Option 8 in Location 428 (refer to Section 18.5  
Consumer Options 1 on page 75). When this option is  
selected, the STAY indicator flashes once every 3 sec  
when Day Alarm is active.  
Pressing and holding [8] down continuously changes  
the tone of the buzzer in the remote codepad. There  
are fifty different tones from 1500 Hz to 5000 Hz. In  
an installation with multiple codepads, you can set a  
different tone for each codepad.  
To change the buzzer tone:  
1. Press and hold [8] continuously.  
The tone of the buzzer increases in pitch.  
To turn Day Alarm on:  
Press and hold [4] until three beeps sound.  
To turn Day Alarm off:  
2. Release [8] button when you hear the desired  
tone.  
Press and hold [4] until two beeps sound.  
6.3.8 Fault Analysis Mode  
Every time power is removed from the  
system, you must reset each codepad to  
its individual tone using this function.  
There are a number of system faults that can be  
detected by the control panel. When any of these  
faults are present, the FAULT indicator flashes and  
the codepad beeps once per minute. Refer to Section  
4.12 Fault Analysis Mode on page 22 for more  
information on each fault type.  
6.3.12 Send Test Report  
Pressing and holding [9] until two beeps sound sends  
a Test Report (Contact ID Event Code 602) to test  
the dialing and reporting capabilities of the system  
without activating the sirens.  
To determine the type of fault:  
7.0 Remote Arming by  
Telephone  
You can arm your system from any remote location  
by telephone. For security reasons, you cannot disarm  
the system using this method. A touch-tone telephone  
is required to use this feature.  
Press and hold [5] until two beeps sound.  
The STAY, AWAY, and FAULT indicators flash.  
One or more zone indicators (1 to 8) light to indicate  
the type of fault that occurred. Refer to Table 14 on  
page 22.  
To Exit from Fault Analysis Mode:  
To remotely arm your system by telephone:  
Press [AWAY].  
1. Call the telephone number to which your control  
panel is connected.  
The STAY and AWAY indicators turn off and the  
system returns to the disarmed state.  
When the control panel answers the incoming  
call, a short jingle sounds.  
6.3.9 Initiate a Modem Call  
Pressing and holding [6] until two beeps sound forces  
the control panel to dial the callback telephone  
number programmed in Locations 159 to 174 (refer  
to Section 11.9 Call Back Telephone Number on page 49)  
in an attempt to connect to the installer’s remote  
computer.  
If you hear a number of unusual tones  
when the control panel answers the  
incoming call, the system is programmed  
for remote programming functions. Wait  
for a pause in the tones and follow Step 2  
to arm the system remotely.  
The remote computer must be running the CC816  
Alarm Link Software and must be set to Waiting for  
an Incoming Call. If no callback telephone number is  
programmed, pressing and holding [6] has no effect.  
2. Hold the phone controller to the mouthpiece of  
the telephone and press and hold the button on  
the side of the unit for 3 sec.  
You can also press and hold [*] on the touch-tone  
telephone for 3 sec to arm the system.  
6.3.10 Reset Latching Outputs  
Pressing and holding [7] until two beeps sound resets  
any output that is programmed to remain on after it is  
activated.  
Two beeps sound to indicate that the system is  
armed in AWAY Mode.  
3. Hang up the telephone.  
The system remains armed.  
The output must be programmed with a latching  
polarity. Refer to Section 16.3 Output Polarity on  
page 68 for more information.  
38  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 8.0 Alarm Link Software  
If the control panel does not answer the call, the  
system might be armed already, remote functions are  
not enabled, or the Ring Count is set to 0. To enable  
remote arming by telephone, select Option 2 in  
Location 177 (refer to Section 12.1 Dialer Options 1 on  
page 50). To set the number of rings before the  
control panel answers, refer to Section 11.10 Ring  
Count on page 49.  
To dial the remote computer:  
Press and hold [6] until two beeps sound on the  
remote codepad.  
8.1.2 Remote Connect without Callback  
Verification  
Remote connect without callback verification is useful  
if you must perform Upload/Download functions  
from multiple locations.  
When both Remote Arming and  
There are two methods to disable callback  
verification. Remember that using this feature reduces  
the security of the control panel.  
Upload/Download are selected, the  
control panel answers the call expecting  
the remote computer. When this occurs,  
modem negotiating tones sound rather  
than the remote arming jingle.  
Method One  
Method one allows you to call the control panel from  
any remote location without the control panel calling  
back to the computer to establish a link. When using  
this method, the customer cannot initiate a modem  
call by holding down [6].  
8.0 Alarm Link Software  
You can program or control the ICP-CC404 Control  
Panel remotely using an IBM or compatible personal  
computer and the CC816 Alarm Link Software. This  
software allows you to change your customer’s  
control panel without leaving your office, improving  
customer service and saving you time and money.  
For locations where a control panel is installed  
hundreds of kilometres from your office, the  
To program method one:  
1. Program Locations 159 to 174 for the Call Back  
Telephone Number to 0 (refer to Section 11.9 on  
page 49).  
2. Select Option 1 and disable Option 2 in Location  
180 (refer to Section 8.2 Alarm Link Options on  
page 40).  
Upload/Download feature is invaluable.  
To use the Alarm Link Software with the ICP-CC404  
Control Panel, set the control panel type in the Alarm  
Link database to I404-V10.  
The control panel allows connecting the first call  
without calling the remote computer.  
Method Two  
When adding a new customer in the Alarm Link  
Software, the Subscriber ID Number and the Installer  
Code must match the values programmed in the  
control panel for synchronisation when connecting to  
the control panel. If these two locations do not match  
those of the control panel, you cannot synchronize  
the computer and the control panel.  
Method two allows you to program a callback  
telephone number so the customer can still initiate a  
modem call when necessary. When you call the  
control panel from a remote location using the  
computer, the control panel does not call back the  
remote computer to establish a link.  
To program method two:  
8.1  
Remote Connect  
1. Program the Call Back Telephone Number in  
Locations 159 to 174 (refer to Section 11.9 on  
page 49).  
2. Select Option 1 and disable Option 2 in Location  
180 (refer to Section 8.2 Alarm Link Options on  
page 40).  
The remote connect feature allows you to establish a  
connection through the telephone network from your  
IBM or compatible computer to the ICP-CC404  
Control Panel. This software allows you to offer faster  
service to your clients.  
8.1.1 Remote Connect with Customer Control  
The control panel allows connecting the first call  
without calling the remote computer to make contact  
and allows the customer to initiate a modem call by  
holding down [6].  
If you want to configure the control panel so a remote  
connection can only be established when the client  
initiates it through the remote codepad, program the  
following information:  
8.1.3 Remote Connect with Callback Verification  
Program the Call Back Telephone Number in  
Locations 159 to 174 (refer to Section 11.9 on  
page 49).  
Remote connect with callback verification offers the  
highest degree of data security through a two-level  
security check.  
Disable Option 1 in Location 180 (refer to Section  
8.2 Alarm Link Options on page 40).  
In the first level, the Installer Code and the  
Subscriber ID Number must match those of the  
control panel. In the second level of security, the  
control panel calls the programmed callback  
telephone number to establish the valid connection.  
The control panel is now set so the client controls  
when a remote connection can be established.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 9.0  
Domestic Dialing  
To program the control panel for remote  
connection with callback verification:  
1. Program the Call Back Telephone Number in  
Locations 159 to 174 (refer to Section 11.9 on  
page 49).  
4 – Terminate Alarm Link Connection on Alarm  
If an alarm occurs when the control panel is  
communicating with a remote computer using the  
CC816 Alarm Link Software, the Alarm Link session  
ends and the alarm message is sent to the base station  
receiver.  
2. Select Options 1 and 2 in Location 180 (refer to  
Section 8.2 Alarm Link Options on page 40).  
If an alarm occurs that does not need to be sent to the  
base station receiver, the session does not end. If this  
option is not selected and an alarm occurs, the Alarm  
Link software prompts the operator with a Terminate  
or Continue message.  
8.1.4 Direct Connect  
The direct connect feature gives the installer a simple  
method to program the ICP-CC404 Control Panel  
using a portable computer. Because telephone lines  
and modems are not required, programming the  
control panel is easily completed in minutes.  
9.0 Domestic Dialing  
The locations of the primary and secondary  
telephone numbers for Receiver 1 or Receiver 2 are  
used only for base station and pager reporting. When  
either Receiver 1 or Receiver 2 is set up for domestic  
reporting, both the primary and secondary telephone  
numbers are ignored.  
To use the direct connect feature, connect the CC808  
Direct Link Cable between the correct serial port on  
your IBM or compatible computer and the auxiliary  
module socket on the control panel.  
To use the direct connect feature, it is not necessary  
to select Option 1 in Location 180 to enable  
uploading and downloading using Alarm Link. The  
direct connect feature ignores this option.  
The domestic dialing telephone numbers are stored  
separately in Locations 466 to 513. These locations  
can store up to 48 digits. These 48 locations can store  
one or more telephone numbers. Depending on the  
length of each telephone number, these locations can  
store four or more different telephone numbers for  
domestic dialing.  
8.2  
Alarm Link Options  
Program this parameter in Location 180.  
The default value is 3.  
When programming this location, there are four  
options you can select. You can select any  
combination of the options by programming a single  
value. Calculate this value by adding the option bit  
numbers together. Refer to Section 2.3 Programming  
Option Bits on page 10 for more information.  
If both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 are set up for  
domestic reporting format, you still have 48 data  
locations. Both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 use the  
same domestic telephone numbers. Programming  
separate domestic telephone numbers for Receiver 1  
and Receiver 2 is not available for domestic dialing  
format.  
The Alarm Link Options are:  
1 – Enable Upload/Download Using Alarm Link  
Refer to Section 9.2 Setting Up and Programming  
Domestic Reporting for more information.  
Select this option to use the CC816 Alarm Link  
Software to program the control panel remotely. The  
control panel does not respond to the Alarm Link  
Software if this option is not selected. Refer to Section  
8.0 Alarm Link Software on page 39 for more  
information.  
9.1  
Domestic Dialing Function  
When the control panel activates an alarm, it dials the  
first programmed telephone number. If it detects a  
busy or engaged tone, the control panel hangs up and  
dials the second telephone number (if one is  
programmed). The first call counts as one  
2 – Enable Alarm Link Call Back  
If this option is selected and a callback telephone  
number is programmed, the remote programming  
computer must be connected to the telephone line  
programmed in the Call Back Telephone Number in  
Locations 159 to 174 (refer to Section 11.9 on  
page 49).  
unsuccessful dialing attempt. If the second telephone  
number is also busy or an engaged tone is detected,  
the control panel hangs up and dials the third  
telephone number (if one is programmed) or attempts  
the first telephone number again.  
If this option is not selected, the installer can connect  
to a customer’s control panel from any remote  
location for upload or download operations without  
the control panel calling the remote computer, and  
the customer can initiate a modem call from the  
codepad by holding down [6]. Refer to Section 8.0  
Alarm Link Software on page 39 for more information.  
40  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 9.0 Domestic Dialing  
If a busy tone is not detected, the control panel  
assumes that the telephone was answered and sends  
its transmission. The transmission sequence consists  
of an identification beep, followed by a siren tone and  
a long pause. The transmission sequence is repeated  
until the control panel receives an acknowledgment  
tone during the pause. The control panel  
3. Enter [9 6 0] and press [AWAY] to exit from the  
Installer’s Programming Mode.  
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators turn off. The system returns to the  
disarmed state.  
4. To program your telephone numbers, enter the  
Installer Code and press [2][AWAY].  
automatically hangs up after 2 min. If more than one  
control panel sends reports to the same telephone  
number, the identification beep allows the customer  
to identify the control panel that called. The  
identification beep is programmed in Location 039 of  
the Subscriber ID Number for Receiver 1 or  
Location 079 of the Subscriber ID Number for  
Receiver 2.  
Three beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash.  
If there are telephone numbers already  
programmed, they appear one digit at a time  
using the codepad indicators.  
If there are no programmed telephone numbers,  
an additional two beeps sound after entering this  
mode. These two beeps normally sound after the  
last digit of the last phone number lights.  
When set up for Domestic Dialing Format,  
the control panel attempts up to six calls  
per alarm event. This count includes any  
unsuccessful calls. The counter is reset if  
the zone is reactivated and the control  
panel attempts six additional calls. The  
control panel stops dialing after six  
attempts or three successful calls. The  
control panel also stops dialing if a valid  
User Code is entered at the remote  
codepad.  
5. Enter the digits for telephone number 1, one digit  
at a time (refer to Table 31).  
As you enter each digit, the corresponding  
codepad indicator lights.  
Table 31: Domestic Dialing Digits  
Digit  
Required  
Number to  
Program  
Digit  
Required  
Number to  
Program  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
*
8
9
If both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 are  
programmed for domestic dialing, the  
maximum number of calls per alarm  
event is twelve.  
refer to 0  
* 1  
* 2  
* 3  
* 4  
#
To acknowledge domestic dialing:  
4 sec pause  
break  
15  
If the received call is not acknowledged during any of  
the transmission pauses by pressing the [*] button on  
a touch-tone telephone or by using the CC911 Phone  
Controller, the control panel continues to send its  
transmission for 2 min. It then hangs up and dials the  
next telephone number. If the call is successfully  
acknowledged, the control panel hangs up and makes  
no more calls for that event.  
* 5  
6. After you enter all the digits of the first telephone  
number, press [STAY][4] to insert a break  
between the first telephone number and the  
second telephone number.  
7. Repeat Step 6 for each additional phone number.  
8. After the last digit of the last telephone number,  
press [AWAY] to exit from this mode.  
9.2  
Setting Up and Programming  
Domestic Reporting  
Example  
Programming the control panel for domestic  
reporting is extremely simple when using the  
Installer’s Programming Command 965. Refer to  
Section 2.4.8 Command 965 – Set Up Domestic Dialing  
Format on page 13 for more information.  
To program two separate telephone numbers (9672  
1777 and 9672 1233), enter the following sequence:  
[1 2 3 4 2][AWAY][9 6 7 2 1 7 7 7][STAY]  
[4 9 6 7 2 1 2 3 3][[AWAY]  
To set up the control panel for domestic dialing:  
1. Enter the Installer Code and press [AWAY] to  
enter Installer’s Programming Mode.  
You can cancel domestic dialing at any time (for  
example, you are moving house and do not want the  
system to continue calling your work place or mobile  
phone).  
Two beeps sound and the STAY and AWAY  
indicators flash.  
To disable domestic dialing:  
2. Enter [9 6 5] and press [AWAY].  
Enter the Installer Code and press  
[2][AWAY][STAY][4][AWAY].  
Two beeps sound. The control panel is now set  
up for Domestic Dialing Format.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 10.0 Dialer Reporting Formats  
10.1.1 Contact ID Format  
10.0 Dialer Reporting Formats  
10.1 Transmission Formats  
The ICP-CC404 Control Panel provides a number of  
transmission formats for its dialing and  
communication features. Program the transmission  
format for Receiver 1 in Location 033 and the  
transmission format for Receiver 2 in Location 073  
(refer to Section 11.4 Transmission Format for Receiver 1  
and Receiver 2 on page 47). The control panel is set at  
the factory to report in the Contact ID Format.  
Contact ID Format can identify hundreds of  
protection zones by their unique codes. This format  
provides a single-digit Event Qualifier and a three-  
digit Event Code that quickly identifies the reported  
condition.  
In general, Contact ID Format is very simple because  
most of the Event Codes and Point ID Codes are  
predefined. The base station software usually can  
identify an alarmed zone by its Point ID Code and  
usually pays little attention to the Event Code.  
Refer to Table 33 on page 43 for more information  
about the ICP-CC404 Point ID Codes.  
Table 32: Contact ID Format Breakdown  
Subscriber ID  
Number  
Qualifier  
Event Code  
Group Number  
Point ID Number  
SSSS  
Q
XYZ  
GG  
CCC  
Four-digit  
Subscriber ID  
Number  
Event Qualifier, which provides Event Code  
Group Number  
(comprised of two  
hex digits)  
Point ID Number  
(comprised of three  
hex digits)  
specific event information:  
1 – New event or opening  
3 – New restore or closing  
(comprised of three  
hex digits)  
42  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 10.0 Dialer Reporting Formats  
Table 33: Point ID Codes  
Point ID  
Event Description  
Event Code Explanation  
Section  
14.3.1  
14.3.1  
14.3.1  
14.3.1  
14.3.1  
14.3.1  
14.3.1  
15.7  
Zones 1 to 8  
Burglary Zone  
Medical Zone  
Panic Zone  
Hold-Up Zone  
Tamper Zone  
Burglary Zone  
Fire  
130  
100  
120  
122  
137  
133  
110  
401  
Burglary  
24-Hour Medical  
24-Hour Panic  
24-Hour Hold-Up  
24-Hour Tamper  
24-Hour Burglary  
24-Hour Fire  
User Specific 1 to 16  
Open/Close Report  
Opening – User #  
Closing – User #  
040  
031  
AC MAINS Fail  
Low Battery  
301  
309  
121  
120  
110  
100  
421  
602  
602  
307  
380  
570  
300  
AC Power  
15.15  
15.17  
15.8  
Battery Test Failure  
Duress Alarm  
Panic Alarm  
User Specific 1 to 16  
041  
046  
045  
042  
044  
047  
Zone Specific 1 to 8  
Zone Specific 1 to 8  
Zone Specific 1 to 8  
00  
Codepad Duress  
Codepad Panic  
Codepad Fire  
Codepad Medical  
Code Retry Limit Exceeded  
Test Report  
Test Report  
Sensor Watch  
Trouble  
15.9  
Fire Alarm  
15.10  
15.11  
15.19  
15.21  
18.5  
15.3  
15.2  
15.1  
15.13  
Medical Alarm  
Access Denied  
Test Report  
Test Report  
Sensor Self Test Failure  
Sensor Trouble  
Zone Bypass  
System Trouble  
Bypass  
AUX Power Supply Fail  
10.1.2 Point ID Codes  
Table 35: 4 + 2 Express Reporting Format  
Table 33 on page 43 shows the different Point ID  
Codes and Event Codes that are sent to the base  
station receiver when using Contact ID Reporting  
Format. All Event Codes are fixed. The control panel  
always sends the same code because there are no  
programming locations to change the codes.  
New Event  
Alarm  
Trouble  
Bypass  
AC Fail  
Low Battery  
Opening Report  
Closing Report  
Test Report  
Program Altered  
Duress  
4 + 2 Report  
SSSS ACH  
SSSS TCH  
SSSS BCH  
SSSS EAC  
SSSS LLB  
SSSS OU  
SSSS CU  
SSSS TEO  
SSSS P0  
10.1.3 4 + 2 Express Reporting Format  
The 4 + 2 Express Format reports a Subscriber ID  
Number followed by an Expansion Code. The  
reporting Channel Number is sent directly after the  
Expansion Code.  
SSSS DD0  
Table 34: Example Reporting in 4 + 2 Express  
Format  
Event  
4 + 2 Report  
SSSS R CH  
SSSS TR CH  
SSSS BR CH  
SSSS ER ACR  
SSSS L LB  
Alarm Restore  
Trouble Restore  
Bypass Restore  
AC Fail Restore  
Low Battery  
Subscriber ID  
Number  
Expansion  
Code  
Channel  
Number  
SSSS  
A
CH  
Low Battery Restore SSSS LBR  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 10.0 Dialer Reporting Formats  
To set up Receiver 1 for basic pager reporting:  
Table 36: 4+2 Express Transmission Code  
Descriptions  
1. Program the Basic Pager’s access telephone  
number in Locations 000 to 015 (refer to Section  
11.1 Primary Telephone Number for Receiver 1 and  
Receiver 2 on page 46).  
2. Program the Subscriber ID Number in Locations  
034 to 039 (refer to Section 11.5 Subscriber ID  
Number for Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 on page 47).  
3. Select Pager Handshake (Option 5) in  
Location 032 (refer to Section 11.3 Handshake Tone  
for Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 on page 47).  
Code  
SSSS  
A
Description  
Subscriber ID Number  
Alarm  
CH  
0
Channel Number  
Zero  
T
Trouble  
B
E
AC  
L
LB  
Bypass  
4. Program Basic Pager Format (Option 5) in  
Location 033 (refer to Section 11.4 Transmission  
Format for Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 on page 47).  
AC Fail Code 1st digit  
AC Fail Code 2nd digit  
Low Battery Code 1st digit  
Low Battery Code 2nd digit  
Open  
To set up Receiver 2 for basic pager reporting:  
1. Program the Basic Pager’s access telephone  
number in Locations 040 to 055 (refer to Section  
11.1 Primary Telephone Number for Receiver 1 and  
Receiver 2 on page 46).  
2. Program the Subscriber ID Number in Locations  
074 to 079 (refer to Section 11.5 Subscriber ID  
Number for Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 on page 47).  
3. Select Pager Handshake (Option 5) in Location  
072 (refer to Section 11.3 Handshake Tone for  
Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 on page 47).  
O
C
Close  
U
User Number  
R
Alarm Restore Code  
Trouble Restore Code  
Bypass Restore Code  
AC Fail Restore Code 1st digit  
AC Fail Restore Code 2nd digit  
Low Battery Restore Code 1st digit  
Low Battery Restore Code 2nd digit  
Duress Code 1st digit  
Duress Code 2nd digit  
Panic Code 1st digit  
Panic Code 2nd digit  
Test Code  
TR  
BR  
ER  
ACR  
LR  
LBR  
D
D0  
P
4. Program Basic Pager Format (Option 5) in  
Location 073 (refer to Section 11.4 Transmission  
Format for Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 on page 47).  
The example in Figure 6 shows:  
PCH  
TE  
Transmission from Subscriber ID Number 5678  
Zone 2 in alarm  
Zone 3 manually isolated  
The system is armed  
The Panic Zone is normal  
The AC is connected  
There is no fault condition.  
10.1.4 Basic Pager Reporting Format  
Although Basic Pager Format requires some  
interpretation of the numbers that appear on the  
display, it can differentiate between 1000 different  
control panels if a number of control panels report to  
the one pager.  
44  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 10.0 Dialer Reporting Formats  
Figure 6: Basic Pager Display  
1 – Subscriber ID number  
2 – Zone status  
3 – System status  
4 – 0 – Zone Normal  
1– Alarm  
2 Manually Isolated  
5 – 8 – Disarmed  
9 Armed  
6 – 0 – Normal  
1 – Panic/Duress  
2 – Fire Alarm  
3 – Medical Alarm  
7 – 0 – AC Normal  
1 – AC Failure  
8 – 0 – System Normal  
1 – System Fault  
10.2 Basic Pager Display Information  
Subscriber ID Number  
Table 37: Zone Status Display Descriptions  
This is the identification number of the control panel  
and is programmed in Locations 034 to 039 for  
Receiver 1 and Locations 074 to 079 for Receiver 2  
(refer to Section 11.5 Subscriber ID Number for Receiver 1  
and Receiver 2 on page 47). The pocket pager displays  
only the last three digits of the Subscriber ID  
Number.  
Status  
Zone Description  
0
Zone normal  
The zone is sealed.  
Alarm  
The zone is unsealed and in alarm.  
Zone bypassed  
A system operator manually isolated the  
zone. Refer to Section 4.11 Isolating Zones  
on page 21 for information about manually  
isolate a zone(s) prior to arming the system  
Refer to Section 15.1 Zone Status –  
Bypass Reports on page 60 for more  
information.  
1
2
Zone Status  
The zone status display shows you the status of each  
zone (1 to 8) of the control panel. Table 37 describes  
each status number when displayed on a pocket  
pager.  
3
Zone trouble  
A zone was left unsealed after the end of  
Exit Time. Refer to Section 15.2 Zone  
Status – Trouble Reports on page 60 for  
more information.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 11.0 Dialer Information  
System Status  
Example  
The system status information is shown by four digits,  
which are defined in Figure 6 on page 45. The first  
digit indicates whether the system is armed or  
disarmed. The second digit indicates whether a  
codepad alarm was activated by the operator (refer to  
Section 4.7 Codepad Duress Alarm on page 21 through  
Section 4.10 Codepad Medical Alarm on page 21 for  
more information). The third digit indicates the status  
of the AC MAINS supply. The fourth digit indicates  
whether a system fault occurred at the control panel  
(refer Section 4.12 Fault Analysis Mode on page 22 for  
more information.  
To program the telephone number 9672 1055 as the  
Primary Telephone Number for Receiver 1, program  
the following sequence into Locations 000 to 015:  
[9 6 7 2 1 10 5 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0]  
To enter a 4-sec pause in the dialing sequence,  
program a 13. A pause might be necessary when the  
dialer communicates through an old (slower)  
telephone exchange or when a PABX system is in  
place.  
Example  
To program the number 02 pause 9 672 1055, enter:  
[10 2 13 9 6 7 2 1 10 5 5 0 0 0 0 0].  
11.0 Dialer Information  
Table 38 shows how to program the numbers, keys,  
and functions for a telephone number.  
This section outlines the programming information  
required for the ICP-CC404 Control Panel when  
communicating with a base station receiver. These  
parameters specify the telephone numbers to call, the  
transmission formats, handshake tones, and  
transmission speeds.  
11.1 Primary Telephone Number for  
Receiver 1 and Receiver 2  
Program the Primary Telephone Number for  
Receiver 1 in Locations 000 to 015.  
The control panel can report event information from  
two on-board dialers. The first dialer reports to  
Receiver 1 and the second dialer reports to Receiver  
2. You can program each dialer with two separate  
telephone numbers, handshake tone, reporting format  
type, and Subscriber ID Number.  
Program the Primary Telephone Number for  
Receiver 2 in Locations 040 to 055.  
The default value for both telephone numbers is  
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.  
When the control panel sends a report, Number this  
number to contact the monitoring station or pager,  
for example. If the call is successful, the information  
is sent and the dialer returns to Standby Mode.  
Example  
You can set up Dialer 1 to report in Domestic Dialing  
Format to Receiver 1 and set up Dialer 2 to report to  
a base station receiver in Contact ID Format only if  
Dialer 1 is unsuccessful.  
If unsuccessful, the dialer attempts two more calls  
using the Primary Telephone Number for Receiver 1.  
If these calls are unsuccessful, the dialer calls the  
Secondary Telephone Number for Receiver 1 up to  
three times. If the dialing sequence is still  
unsuccessful, the control panel repeats this sequence  
by dialing the Primary and Secondary Telephone  
Numbers for Receiver 2 (if they are programmed).  
To program a telephone number:  
You must program a 0 as 10. Each location in the  
primary, secondary, and callback telephone numbers  
stores one digit of the telephone number.  
You must insert a 0 at the end of a telephone number  
to indicate to the dialer the end of the telephone  
number is reached. The dialing sequence ends when  
a 0 appears. Refer to Table 38.  
If the first six attempts are unsuccessful and no  
telephone numbers for Receiver 2 are programmed,  
this procedure is repeated only once, for up to twelve  
call attempts per alarm, after ten min.  
Table 38: Dialing Digits  
If the Primary and Secondary Telephone Numbers  
for Receiver 2 are also programmed, the control  
panel attempts up to 24 calls per alarm.  
Digit  
Required  
Number to  
Program  
Digit  
Required  
Number to  
Program  
Contact your monitoring station or pager company  
for the correct telephone numbers before you  
program these locations.  
terminator  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
*
8
9
10  
11  
12  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
#
4 sec pause 13  
break 14  
46  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 11.0 Dialer Information  
4 – No Handshake  
When Receivers 1 or 2 is set up for  
domestic reporting, telephone numbers  
programmed into these locations are  
ignored. Refer to Section 6.1.2  
Changing Domestic Phone Numbers on  
page 28 (using the Installer Code  
function) or Section 6.2.3 Changing  
Domestic Phone Numbers on page 33  
(using the Master Code Function).  
Setting these locations to No Handshake Tone is not  
recommended.  
5 – Pager  
Pager Handshake Tone is required to communicate in  
Basic Pager Format.  
11.4 Transmission Format for Receiver 1  
and Receiver 2  
Program the Transmission Format for Receiver 1 in  
Location 033.  
11.2 Secondary Telephone Number for  
Receiver 1 and Receiver 2  
Program the Secondary Telephone Number for  
Program the Transmission Format for Receiver 2 in  
Location 073.  
Receiver 1 in Locations 016 to 031.  
The default value for both Transmission Formats is 1.  
Program the Primary Telephone Number for  
Receiver 2 in Locations 056 to 071.  
These locations select the data format used to send  
reports to the base station receiver. These locations  
also allow you to configure the control panel for  
domestic or basic pager formats. The options are:  
The default value for both telephone numbers is  
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.  
Refer to Section 11.1 Primary Telephone Number for  
Receiver 1 and Receiver 2 on page 46 for programming  
information.  
1 – Contact ID  
2 – 4 + 2 express  
3 – FSK 300 baud Bell  
4 – Domestic  
5 – Basic Pager  
7 – Reserved  
When Receivers 1 or 2 are set up for  
domestic reporting, telephone numbers  
programmed into these locations are  
ignored. Refer to Section 6.1.2  
The Basic Pager option supports only  
eight zones due to protocol limitations. If  
you use more than eight zones, this  
option is not recommended.  
Changing Domestic Phone Numbers on  
page 28 (using the Installer Code  
function) or Section 6.2.3 Changing  
Domestic Phone Numbers on page 33  
(using the Master Code Function).  
If you use the Zone 16, the 4+2 Express  
and FSK 300 Baud formats are not  
recommended because Zone 16 will be  
assigned as "0" and some receivers will  
not support this zone.  
11.3 Handshake Tone for Receiver 1 and  
Receiver 2  
Program the Handshake Tone for Receiver 1 in  
Location 032.  
Program the Handshake Tone for Receiver 2 in  
Location 072.  
11.5 Subscriber ID Number for Receiver  
1 and Receiver 2  
Program the Subscriber ID Number for Receiver 1 in  
The default value for both Handshake Tones is 1.  
These locations set the type of handshake tone  
required for the receivers before data transmissions to  
the monitoring station begin. The options are:  
Locations 034 to 039.  
Program the Subscriber ID Number for Receiver 2 in  
Locations 074 to 079.  
1 – HI LO Handshake  
The default value for both Subscriber ID Numbers is  
0 0 0 0 0 0.  
HI LO Handshake Tone is required to communicate  
in Contact ID Format or High Speed DTMF.  
The Subscriber ID Number is sent to identify the  
calling control panel.  
2 – 1400 Hz  
1400 Hz Handshake Tone is required to  
communicate in Ademco Lo Speed Format or  
Domestic Dialing Format.  
For Basic Pager Format, Locations 034 to 036 (for  
Receiver 1) and Locations 074 to 076 (for Receiver 2)  
are ignored and the first digit of the Subscriber ID  
Number must start in Location 037 (Receiver 1) and  
Location 077 (Receiver 2).  
3 – 2300 Hz  
Reserved.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 11.0 Dialer Information  
When using Domestic Dialing Format, the number of  
identification beeps is determined by the value  
programmed in Location 039 (Receiver 1) and  
Location 079 (Receiver 2). This value allows the  
identification of up to 15 different control panels that  
call the same telephone number.  
Table 39: Telco Arm or Disarm Dialing Digits  
Digit  
Required  
Number to  
Program  
Digit  
Required  
Number to  
Program  
terminator  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
*
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Example  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
To program the Subscriber ID Number as 4729,  
program:  
#
0 0 4 7 2 9  
4 sec pause  
break  
11.6 Dialing Format  
Program the Dialing Format in Location 080.  
The default value for the Dialing Format is 1.  
When the Telco Arming Sequence is activated after  
arming the system in AWAY Mode, the control panel  
redirects all calls to your mobile phone, pocket pager,  
or answering service.  
The Dialing Format determines the method for  
dialing telephone numbers. The options are:  
1 – Australian DTMF (5 digits/sec)  
2 – Australian decadic  
3 – Alternate DTMF and Australian decadic  
4 – International DTMF (touch tone)  
5 – Reversed decadic (10 minus 1)  
6 – Alternate DTMF and reversed decadic  
Contact your telecommunications provider for more  
information on Call Forward operations.  
To turn call forward (immediate) on, enter:  
[* 2 1][forwarding telephone number][#]  
Example  
To immediately forward all incoming calls to the  
telephone number 96721055 after arming the system  
in AWAY Mode, program:  
Options 3 and 6 alternate the dialing sequence  
between DTMF and decadic if the call to the base  
station receiver is unsuccessful. Use caution when  
selecting the dialing method.  
[11 2 1 9 6 7 2 1 10 5 5 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0  
0 0 0 0 0 0]  
Select the Australian method only if the control panel  
is connected to the Australian Telecommunications  
Network. Select the International DTMF dialing  
option only in countries that allow both the caller and  
the receiver to terminate a phone call. Using the  
incorrect format can disable the control panel’s  
patented Telephone Anti-Jamming feature.  
To turn call forward (no answer) on, enter:  
[* 6 1][forwarding telephone number][#]  
Example  
To forward all incoming calls, when there is no  
answer, to the telephone number 96721055 after  
arming the system in AWAY Mode, program:  
The alternating sequence is: DTMF –  
decadic – DTMF – decadic – DTMF –  
decadic.  
[11 6 1 9 6 7 2 1 10 5 5 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0  
0 0 0 0 0 0]  
11.8 Telco Disarming Sequence  
Program the Telco Disarming Sequence in  
Locations 143 to 158.  
11.7 Telco Arming Sequence  
Program the Telco Arming Sequence in Locations 113  
to 142.  
The default value for the Telco Disarming Sequence  
is 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.  
The default value for the Telco Arming Sequence is  
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.  
This parameter allows you to deactivate call diversion  
automatically on your telephone when you disarm the  
system from AWAY Mode. Refer to Table 39.  
These locations allow you to activate call diversion  
automatically on your telephone when you arm the  
system in AWAY Mode. Refer to Table 39.  
To turn call forward (immediate) off, enter:  
[# 2 1 #]  
Example  
To disable call forward (immediate) after disarming  
the system from AWAY Mode, program:  
[12 2 1 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0]  
48  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 11.0 Dialer Information  
To turn call forward (no answer) off, enter:  
Programming the Ring Count to 15 enables  
Answering Machine Bypass in the primary mode.  
When calling the control panel, allow the telephone  
to ring no more than four rings then hang up. If you  
call again within 45 sec, the control panel answers the  
call on the first ring and the connection is established.  
This prevents the answering machine or facsimile  
machine from answering the call. To enable  
Answering Machine Bypass only when the system is  
armed, select Option 2 in Location 177 (refer to  
Section 12.1 Dialer Options 1 on page 50).  
[# 6 1 #]  
Example  
To disable call forward (no answer) after disarming  
the system from AWAY Mode, program:  
12 6 1 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0  
11.9 Call Back Telephone Number  
Program the Call Back Telephone Number in  
Locations 159 to 174.  
Program the Ring Count to 14 to enable Answering  
Machine Bypass in the secondary mode. In this case,  
call the control panel and allow the phone to ring no  
more than two rings and hang up. Wait at least 8 sec  
and call the control panel again. The control panel  
answers on the first ring. If you do not wait the 8 sec,  
the control panel does not answer the call. To enable  
Answering Machine Bypass only when the system is  
armed, select Option 2 in Location 177 (refer to  
Section 12.1 Dialer Options 1 on page 50).  
The default value for the Call Back Telephone  
Number is 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.  
This parameter stores the telephone number to call  
when Upload/Download is requested or the user  
holds down [6] to initiate a modem call from the  
control panel to establish a communications link with  
the remote computer. The computer must be running  
the CC816 Alarm Link Software and must be set to  
Waiting for an Incoming Call.  
The Call Back Telephone Number is also required if  
Remote Connect with Callback Verification is  
required (refer to Section 8.1.3 on page 39).  
Set the Ring Count for the answering or  
facsimile machine to a value greater than  
two rings. Four to six rings is preferred.  
Refer to Section 8.0 Alarm Link Software on page 39 for  
more information.  
Program a 0 into this location to disable  
the control panel from answering an  
incoming call.  
11.10 Ring Count  
Program the Ring Count in Location 175.  
11.11 Telephone Line Fault Options  
The default value for the Ring Count is 8.  
Program the selected Telephone Line Fault Options  
in Location 176.  
Programming this location to a value from 1 to 13  
sets that number of rings before the control panel  
answers an incoming call. Set this count to an  
acceptable level, noting that one ring is “Ring, Ring –  
Ring, Ring” and that a Ring Count of 10 represents  
approximately 60 sec. This location has an effect only  
if Remote Arming, Remote Upload/Download using  
Alarm Link, or both are enabled.  
The default value is 0.  
This location has three options. You can select any  
combination of these options by programming a  
single value. Calculate this value by adding the option  
bit numbers together. Refer to Section 2.3 Programming  
Option Bits on page 10 for more information.  
Programming this location to 0 prevents the control  
panel from answering incoming calls regardless of  
any other programmed options.  
The control panel monitors the telephone line. If the  
telephone line is cut or disconnected for longer than  
40 sec, the control panel lights the FAULT indicator  
on the codepad. The FAULT indicator is  
extinguished after the telephone line is restored for  
longer than 40 sec.  
Answering Machine Bypass  
Answering Machine Bypass allows connecting with  
the control panel for Remote Arming or  
Upload/Download when an answering machine or  
facsimile machine is on the same telephone line.  
There are two different Answering Machine Bypass  
methods. Program a 14 to use the secondary method  
only when there is a large amount of traffic on the  
line (at a home office, for example). This method  
reduces the chance of the control panel incorrectly  
answering an incoming call.  
Option 2 and 4 do not operate unless you  
also enable Option 1.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 12.0 Dialer Options  
The options are:  
2 – Remote Arming by Telephone Allowed  
If you select this option, you can remotely arm the  
system using a standard telephone with the CC911  
Phone Controller or by pressing [*] on your touch-  
tone telephone. Refer to Section 7.0 Remote Arming by  
Telephone on page 38 for more information. Forced  
arming is automatically assumed when this feature is  
used. Refer to Section 14.3.6 Zone Options 2 on page 58  
for more information on forced arming.  
1 – Display FAULT Indicator When the Telephone  
Line Fails  
When this options is selected, the FAULT indicator  
flashes and the codepad buzzer beeps once per  
minute if the control panel detects that the telephone  
line is disconnected. Refer to Section 4.13 Fault  
Descriptions on page 22 for more information.  
2 – Sound Alarm When System Is Armed  
Remote arming by telephone is not affected by  
whether remote functions are enabled or disabled.  
Refer to Section 11.10 Ring Count on page 49 for  
programming the number of rings before the control  
panel answers an incoming call.  
To use Option 2, you must also select Option 1. If the  
control panel detects that the telephone line is  
disconnected when the system is armed, the horn  
speaker, bell, and strobe outputs are activated.  
4 – Sound Alarm when System Is Disarmed  
4 – Answering Machine Bypass Only When Armed  
You must also select Option 1 to use this option. If  
the control panel detects that the telephone line is  
disconnected when the system is disarmed, the horn  
speaker, bell, and strobe outputs are activated.  
Select this option to enable the Answering Machine  
Bypass feature when the system is armed. When the  
system is disarmed, the control panel does not answer  
any incoming calls. This option is useful in high  
telephone traffic installations where the control panel  
could answer an incoming call. Refer to Section 11.10  
Ring Count on page 49 to program Answering  
Machine Bypass.  
If you program 7 in this location, the horn  
speaker, bell, strobe, and EDMSAT  
outputs are all activated when the system  
is armed or disarmed.  
8 – Use Bell 103 for FSK Format (Disabled = CCITT  
V21)  
8 – Reserved  
If this option is selected, the control panel uses the  
BELL 103 transmission frequency at 300 baud. If this  
option is not selected, the control panel uses the  
CCITT V21 transmission frequency at 300 baud.  
12.0 Dialer Options  
When programming these locations, there are up to  
four options per location. You can select any  
combination of the options by programming a single  
value. Calculate this value by adding the option bit  
numbers together. Refer to Section 2.3 Programming  
Option Bits on page 10 for more information.  
12.2 Dialer Options 2  
Program the selected Dialer Options 2 in Location  
178.  
The default value is 0.  
12.1 Dialer Options 1  
Program the selected Dialer Options 1 in Location  
177.  
The options are:  
1 – Open/Close Reports Only if Previous Alarm  
The default value is 9.  
When selected, an Opening Report is sent to the base  
station receiver when the system is disarmed after an  
alarm occurred. When the system is armed, a Closing  
Report is sent. An Opening or Closing Report is not  
sent again until the system registers another alarm.  
The options are:  
1 – Dialer Reporting Functions Allowed  
If you select this option, the dialer operates for all  
functions.  
Open/Close Reports must be enabled in Locations  
333 and 334 (refer to Section 15.6 Open/Close Reports on  
page 61) for this option to work.  
If you do not select this option, the communication  
dialer does not operate.  
Upload/Download using the CC816 Alarm Link  
Software and telephone remote arming remain  
operational regardless of this setting.  
If the system is disarmed when an alarm  
occurs, only a Closing Report is sent the  
next time the system is armed.  
2 – Open/Close Reports for STAY Mode 1 and  
STAY Mode 2  
Select this option if Open and Close Reports are  
required when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1  
or STAY Mode 2.  
50  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 13.0 Access Code  
Open/Close Reports must be enabled in Locations  
333 and 334 (refer to Section 15.6 Open/Close Reports on  
page 61) for this option to work.  
13.1 Installer Code  
Program the Installer Code in Locations 181 to 184.  
The default Installer Code is 1 2 3 4.  
4 – Delay Siren until Transmission Complete  
Use this code to access Installer’s Programming  
Mode. The Installer Code can be up to four digits  
long. After power is applied to the control panel, the  
Installer Code can disarm the system if it is the first  
code used. The next time the Installer Code is used  
enables access to Installer’s Programming Mode.  
If this option is selected, the EDMSAT, horn speaker,  
bell, and strobe outputs are not activated until after  
the control panel sends the message and the base  
station receiver sends a kiss-off back to the control  
panel. If multiple messages are sent, the sirens are  
activated after the last kiss-off is sent.  
Installer Code functions allow the installer to execute  
functions when the system is disarmed without the  
customer’s Master Code. Refer to Section 6.1 Installer  
Code Functions on page 27 for more information.  
If a Codepad Panic, Codepad Fire, or Codepad  
Medical Alarm is activated, the EDMSAT, horn  
speaker, bell, and strobe outputs operate immediately.  
8 – Extend Time to Wait for Handshake from 30 to  
60 Sec  
Refer to Section 2.1 Programming with the Remote  
Codepad on page 9 for more information on  
programming the system.  
By default, the control panel waits approximately 30  
sec for receipt of a valid handshake tone after it dials  
the monitoring station. The handshake tone indicates  
to the control panel that it reached the monitoring  
station and can now send its messages. Selecting this  
option extends this wait time from 30 sec to 60 sec.  
13.2 User Codes  
The purpose of User Codes is to arm and disarm the  
system and to perform other specific functions. A  
Master Code holder can change or delete User Codes.  
Program User Codes 1 to 8 in Locations 185 to 224.  
12.3 Dialer Options 3  
Program Remote Radio User Codes 9 to 16 in  
Locations 225 to 264.  
Program the selected Dialer Options 3 in  
Location 179.  
The default User Codes are listed in Table 40.  
The default is 0. The options are:  
1 – Set DTMF Dialing Pulses to 1 Digit/Sec  
Table 40: Default User Codes  
If this option is not selected, the Australian DTMF  
dialing format dials at 5 digits per sec (that is, 100 ms  
tone, 100 ms pause, 100 ms tone, 100 ms pause).  
User Number Locations  
Code  
Priority  
User #01  
User #02  
User #03  
User #04  
User #05  
User #06  
User #07  
User #08  
RF User #09  
RF User #10  
RF User #11  
RF User #12  
RF User #13  
RF User #14  
RF User #15  
RF User #16  
185 to 189  
2
5
8
0
10  
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
If this option is selected, the Australian DTMF dialing  
format dials at the rate of 1 digit per sec (that is, 500  
ms tone, 500 ms pause).  
190 to 194 15 15 15 15  
195 to 199 15 15 15 15  
200 to 204 15 15 15 15  
205 to 209 15 15 15 15  
210 to 214 15 15 15 15  
215 to 219 15 15 15 15  
2 – Reserved  
4 – Change Decadic Dialing to 60/40  
Some countries have different requirements for  
decadic dialing. Selecting this option changes the  
dialing characteristics from 65/35 (Australian  
Standard) to 60/40. Select this option only when the  
control panel is used in a country that requires  
decadic dialing as 60/40. This option has no effect  
when using DTMF tone dialing.  
220 to 224  
0
15 15 15  
225 to 229 15 15 15 15  
230 to 234 15 15 15 15  
235 to 239 15 15 15 15  
240 to 244 15 15 15 15  
245 to 249 15 15 15 15  
250 to 254 15 15 15 15  
255 to 259 15 15 15 15  
260 to 264 15 15 15 15  
8 – Reserved  
12.4 Alarm Link Options  
For more information about this location, refer to  
Section 8.2 Alarm Link Options on page 40.  
13.0 Access Code  
This section describes the access codes that assign  
privileges and access functions for User Code holders  
of the system. There are two types of access codes,  
the Installer Code and User Codes. Each code allows  
access and operation of control panel functions.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 13.0 Access Code  
User Codes are four digits long. The fifth position  
specifies the priority level for the code. Each User  
Code has its own priority level. More than one User  
Code can have the same priority level. The priority  
level controls the behaviour of the code, such as  
allowing it to arm only, to arm and disarm, or allow  
access to the Master Code functions (refer to  
Section 13.3 User Code Priority on page 52). The  
installer can assign access to Master Code functions to  
multiple User Codes.  
Table 41: Priority Levels  
Level  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
6
Arm or disarm  
Arm only  
Arm or disarm and Open or Close Reports  
Arm only and Close Report  
Arm or disarm and code to isolate  
Arm or disarm, code to isolate, and Open or  
Close Reports  
Only the installer can change the priority  
level.  
8
Arm or disarm and Master Code functions  
10  
Arm or disarm, Master Code functions, and  
Open or Close Reports  
The ICP-CC404 Control Panel can have up to eight  
programmable User Codes (1 to 8) to operate the  
system. Refer to Section 4.0 System Operations on  
page 18 for information about the different methods  
to arm and disarm the system.  
12  
14  
Arm or disarm, Master Code functions, and code  
to isolate  
Arm or disarm, Master Code functions, code to  
isolate, and Open or Close Reports  
Arm/Disarm  
Although 16 User Codes are available, User Codes 9  
through 16 can only be Remote Radio User Codes.  
User Codes 9 to 16 allow systems that require remote  
radio control by hand-held remote transmitters. Refer  
to Section 5.0 Remote Radio Transmitter Operations on  
page 24 for information on remote operations and  
adding and deleting Remote Radio User Codes.  
The user can arm and disarm the system. A Closing  
Report is sent only after a previous code that can  
send an Opening Report disarms the system.  
Arm Only  
The user can arm the system but cannot disarm the  
system. A Closing Report is sent only after a previous  
code that can send an Opening Report disarms the  
system.  
User Code 16 is reported when any of these methods  
is used to arm or disarm the system:  
Arming and disarming using remote radio control  
equipment connected to the RE005E 2-Channel  
Radio Interface.  
Open/Close Reports  
Open and Close reports are sent to the monitoring  
station when the user disarms and arms the system,  
but only if Open/Close Reports is enabled in  
Locations 333 and 334 (refer to Section 15.6 Open/Close  
Reports on page 61).  
Arming and disarming using the CC816 Alarm  
Link Software.  
Arming remotely by telephone.  
Single button arming in AWAY Mode, STAY  
Mode 1, or STAY Mode 2.  
Code To Isolate  
Single button disarming from STAY Mode 1 or  
STAY Mode 2.  
Automatic arming in AWAY Mode or STAY  
Mode 1.  
Automatic disarming from AWAY Mode, STAY  
Mode 1, or STAY Mode 2  
If one or more User Codes has this option included,  
the method of standard isolating is disabled and only  
a User Code with this option in its priority level can  
isolate zones before arming the system using the  
Code to Isolate method. Refer to Section 4.11 Isolating  
Zones on page 21 for more information.  
13.3 User Code Priority  
The installer can assign one of ten different priority  
levels to a User Code. Each priority level allows or  
restricts a user from performing specific functions.  
When priority level 4, 6, 12, or 14 is  
assigned to any User Codes, the  
Standard Isolating method no longer  
operates. Only User Codes with a  
priority level of 4, 6, 12, or 14 can isolate  
zones using the Code to Isolate method.  
Master Code Functions  
The user has access to all Master Code functions.  
Refer to Section 6.2 Master Code Functions on page 31  
for more information.  
52  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 14.0 Zone Information  
14.1.3 Day Alarm Operation  
14.0 Zone Information  
14.1 Day Alarm Information  
Program the desired Day Alarm Zones in  
Location 265.  
The default value is 0.  
If a zone is programmed for Day Alarm, the zone can  
be isolated in the normal way so that it does not  
register as a Day Alarm Zone when the system is  
disarmed. You can only use Zones 1 to 4 as Day  
Alarm Zones.  
You can program the STAY indicator to indicate  
whether Day Alarm is turned on or off by selecting  
Option 8 in Location 428 (refer to Section 18.5  
Consumer Options 1 on page 75). When Day Alarm is  
on, the STAY indicator flashes once every three sec.  
The options are:  
1 – Zone 1  
2 – Zone 2  
3 – Zone 3  
4 – Zone 4  
Zones 5 to 8 can be monitored by programming an  
output to mimic a zone. Refer to Section 16.2 Output  
Event Types on page 65 for more information on the  
Output Event Types that you can program.  
You can select any combination of the options by  
programming a single value. Calculate this value by  
adding the option bit numbers together. Refer to  
Section 2.3 Programming Option Bits on page 10 for  
more information.  
To turn Day Alarm on:  
Press and hold [4] until three beeps sound.  
To turn Day Alarm off:  
Day Alarm allows some zones to be monitored when  
the system is disarmed. Visual or audible indications  
are available at any of the programmable outputs,  
including the codepad buzzer. This function  
accommodates latching and non-latching Day Alarm  
Output Event Types.  
Press and hold [4] until two beeps sound.  
14.2 EOL Resistor Value  
Program the EOL Resistor Value in Location 266.  
The default value is 15.  
When the system is armed in AWAY Mode, STAY  
Mode 1, or STAY Mode 2, zones programmed as  
Day Alarm Zones activate the sirens and dialer just as  
non-Day Alarm Zones do. When Day Alarm is  
activated, it ignores any zone Pulse Count settings  
programmed for that zone (that is, the zone Pulse  
Count is only relevant when the system is armed).  
Table 42: EOL Resistor Options  
Option  
0
Resistor Value  
No EOL  
1
1 kΩ (brown, black, red)  
1.5 kΩ (brown, green, red)  
2.2 kΩ (red, red, red)  
3.3 kΩ (orange, orange, black, brown) 1%  
3.9 kΩ (orange, white, red)  
4.7 kΩ (yellow, violet, red)  
5.6 kΩ (green, blue, red)  
6.8 kΩ (blue, grey, black, brown) 1%  
10 kΩ (brown, black, orange)  
12 kΩ (brown, red, orange)  
22 kΩ (red, red, orange)  
Reserved  
Example  
2
You can set up a Day Alarm at the front door of a  
shop with a pressure mat or electronic beam that is  
activated when a customer enters the shop. When a  
customer walks on the pressure mat or breaks the  
electronic beam, the codepad buzzer beeps.  
3
4
5
6
7
14.1.1 Day Alarm Resetting  
8
An output programmed for Day Alarm Resetting  
operates when a zone programmed for Day Alarm is  
activated. The output is reset after the zone is  
resealed. This occurs only when the system is  
disarmed. Refer to Output Event Type 0,14 Day Alarm  
Resetting on page 66 for more information.  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Split EOL 1% resistors  
14.1.2 Day Alarm Latching  
An output programmed for Day Alarm Latching  
operates when a zone programmed for Day Alarm is  
activated. The zone indicator and the latching output  
is reset when [AWAY] is pressed. This occurs only  
when the system is disarmed. Refer to Output Event  
Type 0,15 Day Alarm Latching on page 66 for more  
information.  
You can program the control panel for different EOL  
(end-of-line) resistor values (refer to Table 42). This is  
a global parameter that affects all zones  
simultaneously. This feature allows you to install the  
ICP-CC404 Control Panel at an existing site without  
changing the EOL resistors. This feature also  
increases the security of the system because eleven  
possible EOL resistor values can be used, which  
makes it extremely difficult to tamper with the  
system.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 14.0 Zone Information  
If you select split EOL resistors, the control panel  
looks for four Burglary Zones (1 to 4) with 3.3 kΩ  
EOL resistors and four 24-Hour Zones (5 to 8)  
consisting of 6.8 kΩ resistors connected in parallel.  
The Zone 1 terminal on the PCB is the terminal for  
Zones 1 and 5.  
Figure 8: Split EOL Resistors Using  
NO Contacts  
Use caution when using split EOL  
resistors to create four Burglary Zones  
and four 24-Hour Zones. This  
configuration is only suitable for normally-  
closed (NC) contacts. If normally-open  
(NO) contacts are used, as is the case  
with most smoke detectors, a short circuit  
on one zone activates both zones  
connected in parallel.  
If you require NO contacts when using  
split EOL resistors, refer to Figure 8 for  
information on how to connect NO  
contacts.  
Figure 7: Split EOL Resistors Using  
NC Contacts  
1
9
2
9
5
10  
9
6
10  
3
14.3 Zone Programming  
9
4
The programming information for each zone is stored  
in seven locations divided into three groups. The first  
three locations determine how the zone operates, the  
next two locations set up a number of zone options,  
and the last two locations store the dialer reporting  
information for the zone.  
7
10  
8
10  
Zone Operating Information  
1 – Zone 1  
2 – Zone 2  
3 – Zone 3  
4 – Zone 4  
5 – Zone 5  
6 – Zone 6  
7 – Zone 7  
8 – Zone 8  
9 – 3.3 kΩ  
10 6.8 kΩ  
These locations store the Zone Type (for example,  
Delay-1, Instant, or 24-Hour), the Zone Pulse Count,  
and the Zone Pulse Count Time. The Zone Pulse  
Count specifies the number of times the zone must  
activate within the time specified in the Zone Pulse  
Count Time. Refer to Sections 14.3.1 Zone Types, 14.3.2  
Zone Pulse Count on page 56, and 14.3.3 Zone Pulse  
Count Time on page 56 for more information.  
Zone Options  
These two locations allow you to select from a  
number of options. Refer to Sections 14.3.4 Zone  
Options 1 on page 57 and 14.3.6 Zone Options 2 on  
page 58 for more information.  
Zone Reporting Information  
This information includes the locations for the Zone  
Report Code and the Zone Dialer Options.  
54  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 14.0 Zone Information  
The Zone Report Code determines whether the  
control panel sends Alarm Reports for the zone.  
Refer to Section 14.3.7 Zone Report Code on page 59  
for more information.  
Zone Defaults  
The default zone parameters for the ICP-CC404  
Control Panel are listed in Table 43. You can program  
Zones 1 to 4 as any Zone Type, but you can only  
program Zones 5 to 8 as a 24-Hour Zone Type.  
The Zone Dialer Options location enables you to  
specify how a zone sends a report to a base station  
receiver. Refer to Section 14.3.8 Zone Dialer Options on  
page 59 for more information.  
Table 43: Zone Programming Defaults  
Zone  
Number Type  
Default  
Zone Pulse Pulse Zone  
Type Count Time Options 1 Options 2 Code  
Zone  
Report Dialer  
Locations  
267 to 273  
274 to 280  
281 to 287  
288 to 294  
Options  
Zone 1  
Zone 2  
Zone 3  
Zone 4  
Zone 5  
Zone 6  
Zone 7  
Zone 8  
Delay 1  
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
14  
14  
14  
14  
12  
12  
12  
12  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Handover  
Handover  
Instant  
Fixed 24-hr burglary 295 to 301 12  
Fixed 24-hr burglary 302 to 308 12  
Fixed 24-hr fire  
309 to 315 13  
316 to 322  
Fixed 24-hr tamper  
9
14.3.1 Zone Types  
0 – Instant Zone  
3 – Delay-2 Zone  
A Delay-2 Zone (Contact ID Event Code 130) has a  
delay time determined by the value in Locations 400  
and 401 (refer to Section 17.3 Entry Timer 2 on  
page 71). After Entry Time expires, the system  
activates an alarm.  
An Instant Zone (Contact ID Event Code 130)  
immediately sounds the sirens and operates the dialer  
when it is unsealed after the Exit Timer expires.  
If an Instant Zone is not restored when the system is  
disarmed, a Zone Restore Report is automatically sent  
to the receiving party.  
If a Delay-2 Zone is not restored when the system is  
disarmed, a Zone Restore Report is sent to the  
receiving party.  
1 – Handover Zone  
4 – Reserved  
5 – Reserved  
A Handover Zone (Contact ID Event Code 130) acts  
as an Instant Zone if it is activated by itself. If a  
Handover Zone is activated after a Delay Zone, the  
remaining Delay Time is handed over from the Delay  
Zone to the Handover Zone.  
6 – 24-Hour Medical Zone  
A 24-Hour Medical Zone (Contact ID Event Code  
100) is always ready to activate the dialer, horn  
speaker, bell, and strobe, regardless of whether the  
system is armed or disarmed. A Medical Report is  
sent to the base station receiver. A 24-Hour Medical  
Zone does not send a Restore Report until the zone is  
restored.  
Handover can be sequential or non-sequential. The  
default settings is sequential handover. You can  
disable sequential handover by disabling Option 8 in  
Location 426 (refer to Section 18.3 System Options 3 on  
page 74).  
7 – 24-Hour Panic Zone  
If a Handover Zone is not restored when the system  
is disarmed, a Zone Restore Report is automatically  
sent to the receiving party.  
A 24-Hour Panic Zone (Contact ID Event Code 120)  
is always ready to activate the dialer, horn speaker,  
bell, and strobe, regardless of whether the system is  
armed or disarmed. A Panic Report is sent to the base  
station receiver. A 24-Hour Panic Zone does not send  
a Restore Report until the zone is restored.  
2 – Delay-1 Zone  
A Delay-1 Zone (Contact ID Event Code 130) has a  
delay time determined by the value in Locations 398  
and 399 (refer to Section 17.2 Entry Timer 1 on  
page 70). After Entry Time expires, the system  
activates an alarm.  
If a Delay-1 Zone is not restored when the system is  
disarmed, a Zone Restore Report is sent to the  
receiving party.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 14.0 Zone Information  
8 – 24-Hour Holdup Zone  
15 –Zone Not Used  
A 24-Hour Holdup Zone (Contact ID Event Code  
122) is always ready to activate the dialer, horn  
speaker, bell, and strobe, regardless of whether the  
system is armed or disarmed. If you want the holdup  
alarm to be silent, select Option 4 in the first Zone  
Options location (refer to Section 14.3.4 Zone Options 1  
on page 57). A 24-Hour Holdup Zone does not send  
a Restore Report until the zone is restored.  
If a zone is not used, program the zone type location  
as 15. An EOL resistor is not required if this zone  
type is used. This zone type never sounds the sirens  
or activates the dialer.  
14.3.2 Zone Pulse Count  
Zone pulse count is the number of times a zone must  
be activated before the zone registers an alarm. The  
number can vary from 0 to 15. The zone pulse count  
value is relative to the time frame (that is, the number  
of pulses that must be present during a particular time  
frame). Refer to Section 14.3.3 Zone Pulse Count Time  
on page 56 for time frame settings.  
9 – 24-Hour Tamper Zone  
A 24-Hour Tamper Zone (Contact ID Event Code  
137) is always ready to activate the dialer, horn  
speaker, bell, and strobe, regardless of whether the  
system is armed or disarmed. A 24-Hour Tamper  
zone does not send a Restore Report until the zone is  
restored.  
A zone programmed with a pulse count  
activates an alarm when it is  
continuously unsealed for 10 sec. A 24-  
Hour Fire Zone programmed with a  
pulse count activates an alarm when it is  
continuously unsealed for 30 sec.  
11 – Keyswitch Zone  
A Keyswitch Zone is used to connect a keyswitch to  
operate the system. Refer to Section 14.3.5 Keyswitch  
Zone Options on page 57 for information on  
programming this zone type. User Code 16 is  
reported when arming and disarming using this  
method of operation. Programming the priority level  
of User Code 16 also affects the operation of the  
Keyswitch Zone. Refer to Section 13.3 User Code  
Priority on page 52 for more information.  
Zone Pulse Count Handover  
Zone pulse count handover operates only with Zone  
Pulse Count Time options 8 to 15. Refer to Section  
14.3.3 Zone Pulse Count Time on page 56 for more  
information.  
Any zone that registers one trigger pulse  
12 – 24-Hour Burglary Zone  
automatically increments any other zone pulse count  
that already registered at least one trigger pulse  
during its respective time. To enable this feature,  
select Option 4 in Location 426 (refer to Section 18.3  
System Options 3 on page 74).  
A 24-Hour Burglary Zone (Contact ID Event Code  
133) is always ready to activate the dialer, horn  
speaker, bell, and strobe, regardless of whether the  
system is armed or disarmed. A 24-Hour Burglary  
zone does not send a Restore Report until the zone is  
restored.  
24-Hour Zones can receive all handover  
pulses from other zones. 24-Hour Zones  
cannot hand over pulses to other zones.  
13 – 24-Hour Fire Zone  
A 24-Hour Fire Zone (Contact ID Event Code 110) is  
always ready to activate the dialer, horn speaker, bell,  
and strobe, regardless of whether the system is armed  
or disarmed. A distinct fire sound is emitted through  
the horn speaker to indicate this type of alarm. This  
fire sound is completely different than the burglary  
sound. A 24-Hour Fire zone does not send a Restore  
Report until the zone is restored.  
14.3.3 Zone Pulse Count Time  
Zone pulse count time is the time frame or period  
over which the programmed number of pulses must  
register to activate an alarm.  
Table 44: Zone Pulse Count Times  
14 – Chime Zone  
20 ms Loop Response  
Option Time (sec)  
150 ms Loop Response  
Option Time (sec)  
A Chime Zone is not a burglary zone. It can never  
sound the sirens or activate the dialer. Its purpose is  
to map the zone to a programmable output to  
indicate if the zone is sealed or unsealed. Refer to  
Output Event Type 4,5 Global Chime on page 68.  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0.5  
1
2
3
4
5
10  
15  
8
20  
9
30  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
40  
50  
60  
90  
120  
200  
Chime zones require EOL resistors and they are  
registered at a remote codepad. These zones do not  
affect the operation of forced arming.  
56  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 14.0 Zone Information  
For zone pulse count time, Options 0 to 7 have a  
zone loop response time of 20 ms and Options 8 to  
15 have a zone loop response time of 150 ms. Loop  
response time is the length of time a zone must be  
unsealed before it can register as a valid pulse.  
2 – Delay Alarm Reporting  
Select this option to allow sending alarm reports on  
selected zones to be delayed so a user can enter a  
code to cancel alarms that are not yet required to  
send a report. All sounding devices (horn speaker,  
strobe, and bell outputs) operate as soon as the alarm  
occurs, but the dialer does not operate until the delay  
time programmed in Locations 406 and 407 expires  
(refer to Section 17.6 Delay Alarm Reporting Time on  
page 71).  
Inertia sensors should use Options 0 to 7 and PIR  
detectors should use Options 8 to 15.  
24-Hour Zones can receive any  
handover pulses from other zones. 24-  
Hour Zones cannot hand over pulses to  
other zones.  
4 – Silent Alarm  
Select this option to program a zone as silent. A silent  
zone does not activate the horn speaker, bell, strobe,  
or EDMSAT outputs. The dialer and all other  
programmable outputs function according to the  
parameters programmed for the zone.  
14.3.4 Zone Options 1  
This location has four programming options. You can  
select any combination of the options by  
programming a single value. Calculate this value by  
adding the option bit numbers together. Refer to  
Section 2.3 Programming Option Bits on page 10 for  
more information.  
8 – Sensor Watch  
Sensor watch allows the control panel to recognize  
when detection devices might have stopped working.  
This feature monitors the operation of a zone over the  
time period programmed in Locations 408 and 409  
(refer to Section 17.7 Sensor Watch Time on page 71).  
1 – Lockout Siren and Lockout Dialer  
Lockout refers to one activation per arming cycle  
(that is, a zone programmed for Lockout can activate  
the sirens or dialer only once).  
This value specifies how many 24-hour periods a  
zone can remain continuously sealed before it  
registers as a Sensor Watch fault. The number of  
hours required to fulfill these 24-hour periods is  
calculated only when the system is disarmed. Every  
time the system is armed in the AWAY Mode, STAY  
Mode 1, or STAY Mode 2, the Sensor Watch Timer  
pauses its count. The Sensor Watch Timer continues  
its count the next time the system is disarmed.  
The next time the system is armed, the zone can  
activate the sirens and dialer once more. Restore  
signals are sent when the system is disarmed.  
The ICP-CC404 Control Panel performs lockout  
differently than other control panels because only the  
first zone to activate an alarm is locked out. All other  
zones that are activated during the same Siren Run  
Time reset when the sirens reset. This prevents an  
intruder from activating all zones and waiting for the  
sirens to stop before re-entering the premises.  
Example  
If the Sensor Watch Time is programmed for 2 days  
and the premises is armed for 12 hours and disarmed  
for 12 hours each day, it takes 4 days before a zone  
can register a Sensor Watch fault.  
Example  
All zones are programmed for both lockout siren and  
dialer. Zone 1 is activated, followed by all other  
zones, which activates the sirens and causes the dialer  
to send a report to the base station receiver. Zone 1 is  
the only zone that stops sending reports to the base  
station receiver because the first activated zone is  
locked out. The remaining zones continue to send  
reports if they are activated again.  
14.3.5 Keyswitch Zone Options  
This section lists the options avialable to Keyswitch  
Zones. If you program a zone as a keyswitch input  
(Zone Type 11), program the selected Keyswitch  
Zone options in the location normally used for Zone  
Options 1. Keyswitch Zones report as User Code 16.  
Use Location 323 to set the number of times the siren  
is allowed to activate before it is locked out (refer to  
Section 14.4 Swinger Shutdown Count for Siren on  
page 59). Use Location 324 to set the number of  
times the dialer is activated before lockout takes effect  
(refer to Section 14.5 Swinger Shutdown Count for Dialer  
on page 59).  
0 – Latching Arm and Disarm in AWAY Mode  
The system is armed or disarmed from AWAY Mode  
when using the latching keyswitch input.  
1 – Latching Arm in AWAY Mode  
The system is armed in AWAY Mode when using the  
latching keyswitch input. Disarming the system is not  
permitted from the Keyswitch Zone.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 14.0 Zone Information  
2 – Latching Disarm from AWAY Mode, STAY Mode  
1, or STAY Mode 2  
14 – Momentary Disarm from STAY Mode 1 or  
STAY Mode 2  
The system is disarmed from AWAY Mode, STAY  
Mode 1, or STAY Mode 2 when using the latching  
keyswitch input. Arming the system is not permitted  
from the Keyswitch Zone.  
The system is disarmed from STAY Mode 1 or STAY  
Mode 2 when using the momentary keyswitch input.  
Arming the system in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode  
2, or arming and disarming the system from AWAY  
Mode is not permitted from the Keyswitch Zone.  
4 – Latching Arm and Disarm in STAY Mode 1  
The system is armed or disarmed in STAY Mode 1  
when using the latching keyswitch input. Arming and  
disarming the system in AWAY Mode is not  
permitted from the Keyswitch Zone.  
Figure 9: Wiring Diagram for Keyswitch Zone  
5 – Latching Arm in STAY Mode 1  
1
2
The system is armed in STAY Mode 1 when using  
the latching keyswitch input. Arming the system in  
AWAY Mode or disarming the system is not  
permitted from the Keyswitch Zone.  
1 – EOL  
2 – Keyswitch (Momentary/Toggle)  
14.3.6 Zone Options 2  
6 – Latching Disarm from STAY Mode 1 or STAY  
Mode 2  
This location has four programming options. You can  
select any combination of the options by  
programming a single value. Calculate this value by  
adding the option bit numbers together. Refer to  
Section 2.3 Programming Option Bits on page 10 for  
more information.  
The system is disarmed from STAY Mode 1 or STAY  
Mode 2 when using the latching keyswitch input.  
Arming the system in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode  
2, or arming and disarming the system in AWAY  
Mode is permitted from the Keyswitch Zone.  
1 – Isolate in STAY Mode 1  
8 – Momentary Arm and Disarm in AWAY Mode  
If this option is selected, the zone can be  
automatically isolated when the system is armed in  
STAY Mode 1.  
The system is armed or disarmed from AWAY Mode  
when using the momentary keyswitch input.  
9 – Momentary Arm in AWAY Mode  
If this option is not selected and the system is armed  
in STAY Mode 1, the zone activates an alarm when  
activated as it normally would in AWAY Mode.  
The system is armed in AWAY Mode when using the  
momentary keyswitch input. Disarming the system is  
not permitted from the Keyswitch Zone.  
You can specify a global entry time for all zones,  
except for 24-Hour Zones, when the system is armed  
in STAY Mode 1. You program this time in  
Locations 404 and 405 (refer to Section 17.5 Entry  
Guard Timer for STAY Mode on page 71). The Entry  
Guard Timer overrides the delay time programmed  
for a Delay Zone. If you program the Entry Guard  
Timer as 0, each zone acts according to its  
programmed zone type.  
10 – Momentary Disarm from AWAY Mode, STAY  
Mode 1, or STAY Mode 2  
The system is disarmed from either AWAY Mode,  
STAY Mode 1, or STAY Mode 2 when using the  
momentary keyswitch input. Arming the system is not  
permitted from the Keyswitch Zone.  
12 – Momentary Arm and Disarm in STAY Mode 1  
The system is armed or disarmed in STAY Mode 1  
when using the momentary keyswitch input. Arming  
and disarming the system in AWAY Mode is not  
permitted from the Keyswitch Zone.  
Refer to Section 4.3 Arming the System in STAY Mode 1  
on page 19 for more information.  
2 – Zone Isolation Allowed  
If this option is selected, the operator can isolate the  
zone before arming the system. If this option is not  
selected, the zone cannot be manually isolated. When  
a zone is manually isolated, a Zone Bypass Report  
(Contact ID Event Code 570) is sent. Refer to Section  
4.11 Isolating Zones on page 21 for more information.  
13 – Momentary Arm in STAY Mode 1  
The system is armed in STAY Mode 1 when using  
the momentary keyswitch input. Arming the system  
in AWAY Mode or disarming the system is not  
permitted from the Keyswitch Zone.  
When isolating 24-Hour Zones, the system  
automatically sends a Zone Bypass Report when the  
zone is selected to be isolated. All non-24-Hour zones  
send a Bypass Report only when the system is armed.  
58  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 14.0 Zone Information  
If you do not want the system to send Zone Bypass  
When the sirens are operating, its counter is only  
Reports, program Locations 325 and 326 to 0 (refer to decreased by the first zone that activated the alarm.  
Section 15.1 Zone Status – Bypass Reports on page 60).  
Any other zones that are activated during Siren Run  
Time do not affect the counter.  
4 – Forced Arming Allowed  
When the Swinger Shutdown Count is reached, all  
zones that were activated are locked out according to  
their individual lockout settings.  
If this option is selected, the system can be armed  
with the zone unsealed. If this option is not selected,  
the system does not allow the User Code holder to  
arm the system until the zone is sealed or manually  
isolated. Refer to Section 4.11 Isolating Zones on  
page 21 for more information.  
Example  
All eight zones are programmed for lockout siren  
with a Swinger Shutdown Count of 3. If Zone 1  
activates an alarm, the Swinger Shutdown Count is  
decreased by one after the end of Siren Run Time to  
a swinger shutdown count of 2.  
8 – Zone Restore Report  
If this option is selected, the zone sends Restore  
Reports when the zone is restored. If this option is  
not selected, the zone does not send Restore Reports  
when the zone is restored.  
After the Siren Run Time is reset from the previous  
alarm, Zone 2 activates an alarm and activates the  
sirens. After the sirens reset, the swinger shutdown  
count is decreased again to 1.  
If a non-24-Hour zone is not restored when the  
system is disarmed, the system automatically sends a  
Zone Restore Report for that zone. All 24-Hour zones  
send a Zone Restore Report only when the zone is  
restored.  
If Zone 3 also activates an alarm after the sirens are  
reset from Zone 2, the Swinger Shutdown Count is  
decreased to 0, which locks out all three zones from  
sounding the sirens until the system resets.  
14.3.7 Zone Report Code  
At this point, the Swinger Shutdown Count for Sirens  
resets to 3 and the process of swinger shutdown for  
remaining zones begins again until all zones are  
locked out.  
If you want the control panel to send Zone Alarm  
Reports, program this location as 1. If not, program  
this location as 0.  
14.3.8 Zone Dialer Options  
14.5 Swinger Shutdown Count for Dialer  
Program the Swinger Shutdown Count for Dialer in  
Location 324.  
By default, a zone reports only to Receiver 1. Table 45  
lists the reporting options for the zone.  
Table 45: Zone Dialer Options  
The default value is 6.  
This location determines the number of times the  
dialer can be activated before lockout options take  
effect. This location has no effect unless you program  
at least one zone for lockout dialer. Refer to Section  
14.3.4 Zone Options 1 on page 57 to program zones for  
lockout dialer.  
Option Description  
0
1
2
4
8
No report required  
Receiver 1  
Receiver 2  
Receiver 1 and Receiver 2  
Receiver 2 only when Receiver 1 fails  
Only alarms activated from zone inputs can decrease  
the Swinger Shutdown Counter. Alarms such as  
Codepad Panic, Code Retries, and other system  
alarms do not affect the Swinger Shutdown Count.  
14.4 Swinger Shutdown Count for Siren  
Program the Swinger Shutdown Count for Siren in  
When the dialer is online, its counter is only  
decreased by the first zone that activated the alarm.  
Any other zones that are activated while the dialer is  
online do not affect the counter.  
Location 323.  
The default value is 3.  
This location determines the number of times the  
sirens can be activated before lockout options take  
effect. Programming a 0 sets the count to unlimited.  
This location has no effect unless you program at  
least one zone for lockout siren. Refer to Section 14.3.4  
Zone Options 1 on page 57 to program zones for  
lockout siren.  
When the Swinger Shutdown Count is reached, all  
zones that were activated are locked out according to  
their individual lockout settings.  
If Lockout Dialer is enabled for any zone,  
the last restore signal is not sent until the  
system is disarmed.  
Only alarms activated from zone inputs can decrease  
the Swinger Shutdown Counter. Alarms such as  
Codepad Panic, Access Denied, and other system  
alarms do not affect the Swinger Shutdown Count.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 15.0 System Reporting Information  
A zone is in trouble when it is unsealed at the end of  
Example  
Exit Time. A Sensor Trouble Report (Contact ID  
Event Code 380) is sent to indicate that one or more  
zones were automatically isolated by the system. 24-  
Hour Zones that are unsealed at the end of Exit Time  
do not send a Sensor Trouble Report because the  
restore for that zone is still outstanding.  
All eight zones are programmed for lockout dialer  
with a Swinger Shutdown Count of 6. If Zone 1  
activates an alarm, the Swinger Shutdown Count  
decreased to 5 when the control panel calls.  
If Zone 1 reactivates the dialer, the Swinger  
Shutdown Count is decreased to 4. If Zone 1  
reactivates the dialer three more times, the Swinger  
Shutdown Count is 1.  
A Sensor Trouble Restore Report is sent for Burglary  
Zones when the zone is resealed or the next time the  
system is disarmed (whichever happens first). A 24-  
Hour Zone sends a restore signal only when it is  
resealed.  
If Zone 2 activates an alarm, the Swinger Shutdown  
Count decreases to 0, which locks out Zone 2 from  
activating the dialer until the system resets. At this  
point, the Swinger Shutdown Count for the Dialer  
resets to 6 and the process of swinger shutdown for  
the remaining zones, including Zone 1, begins again  
until all zones are locked out.  
The Trouble code parameter is used as the expansion  
digit in 4+2 Format. It has no effect on Contact ID  
Format because a Sensor Trouble Report is always  
sent as Event Code 380.  
If Sensor Trouble Reports are not  
required, program Locations 327 and  
328 as 0.  
15.0 System Reporting  
Information  
This section covers basic housekeeping features of the  
system.  
15.3 Zone Status – Sensor Watch  
Reports  
Program the Sensor Watch Report value in  
Location 329 (the default value is 4) and the Sensor  
Watch Restore Report value in Location 326  
(default 8).  
15.1 Zone Status – Bypass Reports  
Program the Zone Bypass Report value in Location  
325 (the default value is 9) and the Zone Bypass  
Restore Report value in Location 326 (default 8).  
A zone is bypassed when it is manually isolated.  
Refer to Section 4.11 Isolating Zones on page 21 for  
information on isolating zones. A Zone Bypass  
Report (Contact ID Event Code 570) is sent at the  
end of Exit Time for any zone that was manually  
isolated. A 24-Hour Zone sends a Zone Bypass  
Report when the zone is selected to be isolated.  
A Self Test Failure Report (Contact ID Event Code  
307) is sent to the base station receiver when a zone  
was not activated during the Sensor Watch Time  
programmed in Locations 408 and 409 (refer to  
Section 17.7 Sensor Watch Time on page 71). This report  
continues to be sent (according to the frequency of  
the Sensor Watch Time) until the fault is corrected.  
A Zone Bypass Restore Report is sent when the  
system is disarmed. All bypassed zones are cleared  
when the system is disarmed.  
To clear the fault and stop any additional reporting,  
you must unseal and reseal the zone that registered  
the fault. Use the Sensor Watch Time in Locations  
408 and 409 to set the number of days a zone can  
remain sealed without registering a fault. Refer to  
Section 14.3.4 Zone Options 1 on page 57 to select zones  
to be monitored by the Sensor Watch feature.  
The Bypass Code parameter is used as the expansion  
digit in 4+2 Formats. It has no effect on Contact ID  
Format because a Zone Bypass is always sent as  
Event Code 570.  
If Self Test Failure Reports are not  
required, program Locations 329 and  
330 as 0.  
If Zone Bypass Reports are not required,  
program Locations 325 and 326 as 0.  
15.2 Zone Status – Trouble Reports  
15.4 Zone Status – Alarm Restore Code  
Program the Alarm Restore Code value in  
Location 331.  
Program the Zone Trouble Report value in  
Location 327 (the default value is 2) and the Zone  
Trouble Restore Report value in Location 326  
(default 3).  
The default value is 14.  
If Zone Alarm Restore Reports are required, program  
this location as 14. If not, program this location as 0.  
60  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 15.0 System Reporting Information  
Location 332 (Section 15.5 Zone Status Reporting Options  
Table 47: Open/Close Reporting Options  
Option Description  
on page 61) is ignored when programming the Alarm  
Restore code and is global for all zones. A zone  
Restore Report is sent only to the receiving party to  
which the zone is allocated (for example, Receiver 1  
or Receiver 2).  
0
1
2
4
8
No Open/Close Reports required  
Receiver 1  
Receiver 2  
Receiver 1 and Receiver 2  
Receiver 2 only when Receiver 1 fails  
15.5 Zone Status Reporting Options  
Use Location 332 to select whether Zone Status  
Reports are sent to Receiver 1 (the default),  
Receiver 2, or both, Receiver 2 only when Receiver 1  
fails, or there is no reporting at all. Table 46 lists the  
reporting options.  
15.8 Codepad Duress Report  
Program the Codepad Duress Report value in  
Location 336.  
Table 46: Zone Status Reporting Options  
The default value is 6.  
A Duress Report (Contact ID Event Code 121) is sent  
to the base station receiver when a user adds 9 to the  
end of any valid User Code used to disarm the  
system. This alarm is always silent. A Duress Alarm  
can be activated during Exit Time (in other words, if  
the system is armed and then disarmed with a 9 at the  
end of the User Code before Exit Time expires, a  
Duress Report is sent). Adding 9 to the end of a User  
Code when arming the system does not cause a  
Duress Alarm.  
Option Description  
0
1
2
4
8
No report required  
Receiver 1  
Receiver 2  
Receiver 1 and Receiver 2  
Receiver 2 only when Receiver 1 fails  
15.6 Open/Close Reports  
Program the Open Report value in Location 333 (the  
default value is 11) and the Close Report value in  
Location 334 (default 12).  
If you want a 3 to activate a Codepad Duress Alarm  
instead of 9, select Option 2 in Location 430 (refer to  
Section 18.7 Consumer Options 3 on page 75).  
An Opening Report (Contact ID Event Code 401) is  
sent to the base station receiver when the system is  
disarmed from AWAY Mode. A Closing Report  
(Contact ID Event Code 401) is sent at the end of  
Exit Time when the system is armed in AWAY  
Mode.  
Restore Reports are not sent for this  
event.  
If Duress Reports are not required,  
program Location 336 as 0.  
If an expanded format is selected, this code is used as  
the Expansion Code and the user number that armed  
or disarmed the system follows in the same  
transmission.  
15.9 Codepad Panic Report  
Program the Codepad Panic Report value in  
Location 337 (tens digit) and Location 338 (units  
digit).  
To enable Open and Close Reports in STAY Mode,  
select Option 2 in Location 178 (refer to Section 12.2  
Dialer Options 2 on page 50). To enable Open and  
Close Reports only after a previous alarm, select  
Option 1 in Location 178.  
The default values are 7 (tens) and 15 (units).  
A Panic Alarm Report (Contact ID Event Code 120)  
is sent to the base station receiver when a user presses  
either [1] and [3] or [STAY] and [AWAY] at the same  
time. A Panic Alarm is audible, but you can program  
the alarm as silent by selecting Option 1 in Location  
425 (refer to Section 18.2 System Options 2 on page 73).  
If Open and Close Reports are not  
required, program Locations 333 and  
334 as 0.  
Restore Reports are not sent for this  
event.  
15.7 Open/Close Reporting Options  
If Panic Reports are not required,  
program Locations 337 and 338 as 0.  
Use Location 335 to select whether Zone Status  
Reports are sent to Receiver 1 (the default),  
Receiver 2, or both, Receiver 2 only when Receiver 1  
fails, or there is no reporting at all. Table 47 lists the  
reporting options.  
15.10 Codepad Fire Report  
Program the Codepad Fire Report value in Location  
339 (tens digit) and Location 340 (units digit).  
The default values are 7 (tens) and 14 (units).  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 15.0 System Reporting Information  
A Fire Alarm Report (Contact ID Event Code 110) is  
sent to the base station receiver when a user presses  
[4] and [6] at the same time. A Fire Alarm is audible,  
but you can program the alarm as silent by selecting  
Option 2 in Location 425 (refer to Section 18.2 System  
Options 2 on page 73). A distinct fire sound is emitted  
through the horn speaker to indicate this type of  
alarm. The fire sound is different than the burglary  
sound.  
A System Trouble Report (Contact ID Event Code  
300) is sent when either the codepad AUX power  
supply or the accessories AUX power supply fails.  
The system reports the event approximately 10 sec  
after the AUX power supply fails.  
15.14 System Status – AUX Power Supply  
Fail Restore Report  
Program the AUX Power Supply Fail Restore Report  
value in Location 346 (tens digit) and Location 347  
(units digit).  
Restore Reports are not sent for this  
event.  
The default values are 10 (tens) and 8 (units).  
If Fire Reports are not required, program  
Locations 339 and 340 as 0.  
A System Trouble Restore Report (Contact ID Event  
Code 300) is sent when the failed codepad AUX  
power supply or the accessories AUX power supply is  
reset. The system reports the event approximately 10  
sec after the AUX power supply is reset.  
15.11 Codepad Medical Report  
Program the Codepad Medical Report value in  
Location 341 (tens digit) and Location 342 (units  
digit).  
15.15 System Status – AC Fail Report  
Program the AC Fail Report value in Location 348  
(tens digit) and Location 349 (units digit).  
The default values are 7 (tens) and 13 (units).  
A Medical Report (Contact ID Event Code 100) is  
sent to the base station receiver when a user presses  
[7] and [9] at the same time. A Medical Alarm is  
audible, but you can program the alarm as silent by  
selecting Option 4 in Location 425 (refer to Section  
18.2 System Options 2 on page 73).  
The default values are 10 (tens) and 2 (units).  
An AC Fail Report (Contact ID Event Code 301) is  
sent to the base station receiver when the AC mains  
supply is disconnected for 2 min. If you do not want  
an AC Fail Report to be sent until the AC mains  
supply is disconnected for 1 hour, select Option 1 in  
Location 426 (refer to Section 18.3 System Options 3 on  
page 74). If you want to ignore AC Fail, select  
Option 2 in Location 426.  
Restore Reports are not sent for this  
event.  
If Medical Reports are not required,  
program Locations 341 and 342 as 0.  
If AC Fail Reports are not required,  
program Locations 348 and 349 as 0.  
15.12 Codepad Reporting Options  
Use Location 343 to select whether Codepad Alarm  
Reports are sent to Receiver 1 (the default),  
Receiver 2, or both, Receiver 2 only when Receiver 1  
fails, or there is no reporting at all. Table 47 lists the  
reporting options.  
15.16 System Status – AC Fail Restore  
Report  
Program the AC Fail Restore Report value in  
Location 350 (tens digit) and Location 351 (units  
digit).  
Table 48: Codepad Alarm Reporting Options  
The default values are 10 (tens) and 7 (units).  
An AC Fail Restore Report is sent when the AC  
mains supply is connected continuously for longer  
than 2 min.  
Option Description  
0
1
2
4
8
No Codepad Alarm Reports required  
Receiver 1  
Receiver 2  
Receiver 1 and Receiver 2  
Receiver 2 only when Receiver 1 fails  
If AC Fail Restore Reports are not  
required, program Locations 350 and  
351 as 0.  
15.13 System Status – AUX Power Supply  
Fail Report  
Program the AUX Power Supply Fail Report value in  
Location 344 (tens digit) and Location 345 (units  
digit).  
15.17 System Status – Low Battery Report  
Program the Low Battery Report value in  
Location 352 (tens digit) and Location 353 (units  
digit).  
The default values are 10 (tens) and 1 (units).  
The default values are 10 (tens) and 3 (units).  
62  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 15.0 System Reporting Information  
A Battery Test Failure Report (Contact ID Event  
Code Retries  
Code 309) is sent to the base station receiver when  
the system’s battery voltage falls below 11.2 VDC or  
when a dynamic battery test detects that a low  
capacity battery.  
The Code Retries feature restricts the number of  
times an invalid User Code can be entered in an  
attempt to operate the system. Location 356 sets the  
number of incorrect code attempts that causes an  
alarm. When the number of incorrect code attempts  
equals the number programmed in this location, the  
system performs these actions:  
The control panel continually monitors the battery  
voltage. Refer to Section 4.13 Fault Descriptions on  
page 22 for more information. A dynamic battery test  
is performed every time the system is armed and  
every four hours after the control panel is powered  
up.  
Activates the sirens, internal screamers, and  
strobes connected to the control panel. Select  
Option 8 in Location 425 (refer to Section 18.2  
System Options 2 on page 73) to change this alarm  
to silent.  
If Low Battery Reports are not required,  
program Locations 352 and 353 as 0.  
Shuts down all codepads connected to the control  
panel and locks them out for the time period  
programmed in Location 410 (refer to Section 17.8  
Codepad Lockout Time on page 71).  
Sends an Access Denied Report (Contact ID  
Event Code 421) to the base station receiver.  
Outputs 1 to 4 do not operate when the  
control panel detects a low battery.  
15.18 System Status – Low Battery  
Restore Report  
Each time the system is armed or disarmed, the Code  
Retries counter is reset. You can program the counter  
to a value from 1 to 15. If you want the number of  
incorrect code attempts to be unlimited, program a 0  
in Location 356. In this case, the Access Denied  
Report is never generated and the system does not  
perform the three actions listed above. This function  
works when the system is armed or disarmed.  
Program the Low Battery Restore Report value in  
Location 354 (tens digit) and Location 355 (units  
digit).  
The default values are 10 (tens) and 6 (units).  
A Low Battery Restore Report is sent if the backup  
battery is restored the next time the system is armed,  
or when the next dynamic battery test reports the  
battery test is OK.  
15.20 System Status Reporting Options  
If Low Battery Restore Reports are not  
required, program Locations 354 and  
355 as 0.  
Use Location 359 to select whether System Status  
Reports are sent to Receiver 1 (the default),  
Receiver 2, or both, Receiver 2 only when Receiver 1  
fails, or there is no reporting at all. Table 47 lists the  
reporting options.  
15.19 System Status – Access Denied  
Program the Code Retry Limit in Location 356.  
The default value is 6.  
Table 49: System Status Reporting Options  
Program 0 to allow unlimited retries.  
Program the Access Denied Report value in  
Location 357 (tens digit) and Location 358 (units  
digit).  
Option Description  
0
1
2
4
8
No System Status Reports required  
Receiver 1  
Receiver 2  
Receiver 1 and Receiver 2  
Receiver 2 only when Receiver 1 fails  
The default values are 7 (tens) and 12 (units).  
An Access Denied Report (Contact ID Event Code  
421) is sent to the base station receiver when the  
number of incorrect code attempts equals the number  
programmed in Location 356. An Access Denied  
Alarm is audible, but you can program the alarm as  
silent by selecting Option 8 in Location 425 (refer to  
Section 18.2 System Options 2 on page 73).  
15.21 Test Reporting Time  
Program the Test Reporting Time into Locations 360  
to 366 as described in Table 50 on page 64.  
Restore reports for this event are not sent.  
If Access Denied reports are not  
required, program Locations 357 and  
358 as 0.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 16.0 Programmable Outputs  
Table 50: Test Reporting Time Parameters  
Table 51: Test Reporting Options  
Location  
360  
361  
362  
363  
364  
365  
366  
Parameter  
Default  
Option Description  
Hour of day (tens digit)  
Hour of day (units digit)  
Minute of day (tens digit)  
Minute of day (units digit)  
Test Report (tens digit)  
Test Report (units digit)  
Repeat interval in days  
0
0
0
0
7
1
0
0
1
2
4
8
No Test Reports required  
Receiver 1  
Receiver 2  
Receiver 1 and Receiver 2  
Receiver 2 only when Receiver 1 fails  
16.0 Programmable Outputs  
The ICP-CC404 Control Panel has four fully-  
programmable outputs on the main printed circuit  
board and one programmable output that operates  
the codepad buzzer. The four outputs are set by  
default to operate as horn speaker, fire alarm  
verification, strobe, and internal screamer.  
A Test Report (Contact ID Event Code 602) is a  
specific signal sent to the base station receiver and is  
normally used to test the dailing and reporting  
functions of the control panel.  
When programming Test Report options, specify the  
hour and minute of the day the report is required,  
and how often to send the report. Test reports are  
sent on a daily basis from every day to every fifteen  
days. Refer to Section 6.1.1 Set the Number of Days until  
the First Test Report on page 27 to set the first test  
report.  
Outputs 1 to 4 do not operate when the  
control panel detects a low battery.  
Programmable outputs require four parameters to  
operate correctly.  
If Test Reports are not required, program  
the repeat interval in Location 366 as 0.  
Table 52: Output Parameters  
Program the Test Report Time as 24:00  
to send reports every 30 min.  
Parameter  
Description  
Event Type  
The Event Type specifies when an output  
is activated. The Output Event Types are  
listed in Section 16.2. Enter the code for  
the Output Event Type into the two  
Example  
To send Test Reports once every seven days at 11:35  
PM, program Locations 360 to 366 as:  
corresponding locations for the output.  
Polarity  
Polarity determines whether the output  
operates for the duration of the event,  
pulses for the duration, operates once only  
(one shot), or latches on. The polarity  
options are listed in Table 54 on page 69.  
The Time Base and Time Multiplier  
parameters determine how long and how  
often the output operates. Refer to Section  
16.4 Output Timing on page 70.  
2 3 3 5 7 1 7  
15.22 Test Reporting Dialer Options  
Use Location 367 to select whether Test Reports are  
sent to Receiver 1 (the default), Receiver 2, or both,  
Receiver 2 only when Receiver 1 fails, or there is no  
reporting at all. Table 51 lists the reporting options.  
Time Base/  
Time  
Multiplier  
Table 53: Output Programming Defaults  
Output  
Output 1  
Output 2  
Strobe  
Default Output Type  
Locations  
Event Code Polarity  
Time Base  
Time Base Multiplier  
Horn Speaker  
Fire Alarm with Verification 374 to 379  
Strobe – Reset in 8 hr  
Sirens Running  
368 to 373  
1
2
2
1
0
14  
7
0
15  
13  
0
10  
6
1
2
0
2
4
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
5
8
0
1
380 to 385  
386 to 391  
392 to 397  
Relay  
Codepad Entry/Exit Warning and  
Buzzer Day Alarm  
To redirect an output to the codepad buzzer, select an  
output and program it for the desired Output Event  
Type. If the output is functioning correctly, add 8 to  
the first (tens) digit of the Output Event Type.  
16.1 Redirecting Outputs to the Codepad  
Buzzer  
Multiple output event types can be directed to the  
codepad buzzer so the buzzer can indicate a number  
of events.  
64  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 16.0 Programmable Outputs  
Example  
0,6  
Exit Warning with All Zones Sealed or Entry  
Warning  
3,0 Communications Failure  
This output operates during Exit Time when the  
control panel is armed and all zones are sealed. The  
output resets when Exit Time expires.  
This event operates after the dialer makes all possible  
attempts to reach the base station receiver. It resets  
when the control panel receives the first kiss-off. This  
Output Event Type is not applicable to domestic  
reporting.  
This output operates again during Entry Time and  
resets when Entry Time expires or the system is  
disarmed.  
To redirect this Output Event Type to operate a  
codepad buzzer, program the Output Event Type as:  
This output also operates if a zone is activated when  
the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode  
2 and the Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode is  
programmed in Locations 404 and 405 (refer to  
Section 17.5 on page 71).  
11,0 Communications Failure  
The codepad buzzer now operates instead of the  
output that was programmed. Output 3 is no longer  
functional and cannot be used for any other Output  
Event Type.  
0,7  
Exit Warning  
This output operates during Exit Time when the  
system is armed. The output resets when Exit Time  
expires.  
16.2 Output Event Types  
There are approximately 60 Output Event Types.  
Two numbers designate each Output Event Type.  
Program these numbers into the appropriate locations  
for the output.  
0,8  
Exit Warning Finished  
This output operates after Exit Time expires when the  
system is armed. The output resets when the system is  
disarmed.  
All reset times reference Polarities 1 and  
8. Reset times vary depending on the  
selected polarity.  
0,9  
Kiss-Off after Exit Time  
This output operates after the first successful  
transmission to the base station receiver when Exit  
Time expires. The output resets when the system is  
disarmed.  
0,0  
EDMSAT - Satellite Siren (Output 1 Only)  
This output controls all functions of the SS914  
Satellite Siren (EDMSAT). The Speaker Indication  
Beeps option does not function through the satellite  
siren for remote operations. No polarity is required  
for this Output Event Type.  
0,11  
Entry Warning  
This output operates when during Entry Timer 1,  
Entry Timer 2, or Entry Guard Timer for STAY  
Mode. The output resets when the Entry Time  
expires.  
0,1  
System Armed  
This output operates when the system is armed. The  
output resets when the system is disarmed.  
0,12  
Entry Warning + Day Alarm Resetting  
0,2  
System Disarmed  
This output combines Entry Warning and Day Alarm  
Resetting so that either of these two events activates  
the output.  
This output operates when the system is disarmed.  
The output resets when the system is armed.  
If the output is activated by Entry Timer 1, Entry  
Timer 2, or Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode, the  
output resets when the Entry Time expires or the  
system is disarmed.  
0,3  
Armed in STAY Mode  
This output operates when the system is armed in  
STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2. The output resets  
when the system is disarmed.  
If a zone programmed for Day Alarm is activated  
when the system is disarmed, the output resets when  
the zone is resealed. You can turn Day Alarm on and  
off by pressing and holding [4]. Refer to Section 14.1  
Day Alarm Information on page 53 for programming  
zones to operate for Day Alarm.  
0,4  
Armed in AWAY Mode  
This output operates when the system is armed in  
AWAY Mode. The output resets when the system is  
disarmed.  
0,5  
Auto Arm Pre-Arming Alert Time  
0,13  
Resetting  
Exit Warning + Entry Warning + Day Alarm  
This output operates during the time period before  
the control panel is automatically armed in AWAY  
Mode or STAY Mode 1. The output resets when the  
control panel is automatically armed in AWAY Mode  
or STAY Mode 1. The Auto Arming Pre-Alert Time  
is programmed in Location 413 (refer to Section 17.11  
on page 72 for more information).  
This output operates when the system is armed,  
regardless of whether zones are sealed or unsealed,  
until Exit Time expires.  
The output operates again during Entry Time and  
resets when Entry Time expires or the system is  
disarmed.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 16.0 Programmable Outputs  
The output also operates during the Entry Guard  
Timer for STAY Mode time.  
1,4  
AC Fail  
This output operates when the AC mains fails. The  
output resets when the AC mains is restored. This  
output operates regardless of whether Option 2 in  
Location 426 is selected (refer to Section 18.3 System  
Options 3 on page 74).  
If a zone programmed for day alarm is activated  
when the system is disarmed, the output resets when  
the zone is resealed. You can turn Day Alarm on and  
off by pressing and holding [4]. Refer to Section 14.1  
Day Alarm Information on page 53 for programming  
zones to operate for Day Alarm.  
1,5  
Low Battery  
This output operates when a Dynamic Battery Test  
detects the battery failed or the battery voltage is  
below 11.2 VDC. The Dynamic Battery Test is  
performed every 4 hours after power is applied to the  
system and every time the system is armed.  
0,14  
Day Alarm Resetting  
This output operates when a zone programmed for  
Day Alarm is activated. The output resets when the  
Day Alarm zone is resealed. You can turn Day Alarm  
on and off by pressing and holding [4]. Refer to  
Section 14.1 Day Alarm Information on page 53 for  
programming zones to operate for Day Alarm.  
This output resets only after a Dynamic Battery Test  
detects that the backup battery voltage is normal.  
1,6  
Horn Speaker Monitor Fail  
0,15  
Day Alarm Latching  
If the Enable Monitoring of Horn Speaker (Option 2)  
in Location 424 is selected (refer to Section 18.1 System  
Options 1 on page 73), this output operates when the  
horn speaker is disconnected. The output resets when  
the horn speaker is reconnected.  
This output operates when a zone programmed for  
Day Alarm is activated. The output resets by pressing  
[AWAY]. You can turn Day Alarm on and off by  
pressing and holding [4]. Refer to Section 14.1 Day  
Alarm Information on page 53 for programming zones  
to operate for Day Alarm.  
1,7  
Sensor Watch Alarm  
This output operates when the Sensor Watch Count is  
reached. Refer to Section 14.3.4 Zone Options 1 on  
page 57 for more information on programming zones  
for sensor watch. Refer to Section 17.7 Sensor Watch  
Time on page 71 for setting the number of days before  
a zone registers as a faulty sensor watch zone.  
1,0  
Day Alarm Enabled  
This output operates when Day Alarm is enabled.  
The output resets when Day Alarm is turned off.  
Refer to Section 14.1 Day Alarm Information on page 53  
for programming zones to operate for Day Alarm.  
You can turn Day Alarm on and off by pressing and  
holding [4]. Three beeps indicate that Day Alarm is  
turned on, two beeps indicate that Day Alarm is  
turned off. Refer to Section 6.3.7 Turning Day Alarm On  
and Off on page 38 for more information.  
1,8  
Codepad Medical Alarm  
This output operates when a user activates a Codepad  
Medical Alarm by pressing [7] and [9] at the same  
time on the remote codepad. This output resets when  
a valid User Code is entered at the remote codepad.  
1,1  
Telephone Line Fail  
1,9  
Codepad Fire Alarm  
This output operates when the built-in telephone line  
fault module detects that the telephone line is  
This output operates when a user activates a Codepad  
Medical Alarm by pressing [4] and [6] at the same  
time on the remote codepad. This output resets when  
a valid User Code is entered at the remote codepad.  
disconnected longer than 40 sec. The output resets  
when the telephone line is restored continuously for  
longer than 40 sec. This output does not operate  
unless Option 1 in Location 176 is selected (refer to  
Section 11.11 Telephone Line Fault Options on page 49).  
1,10  
Codepad Panic Alarm  
This output operates when a user activates a Codepad  
Panic Alarm (audible or silent) by pressing either [1]  
and [3] or [STAY] and [AWAY] at the same time on  
the remote codepad. This output resets when a valid  
User Code is entered at the remote codepad.  
1,2  
Kiss-Off Received  
This output operates after the control panel  
successfully sends a message to the receiving party.  
1,3  
AUX Power Supply Fail  
1,11  
Codepad Duress Alarm  
This output operates when either the 1 A codepad  
AUX power supply or the 1 A accessories AUX  
power supply fails. The output resets when the faulty  
AUX power supply is reset.  
This output operates when a user activates a Duress  
Alarm by adding a 9 to the end of the User Code  
used to disarm the system. This output resets the next  
time the system is armed.  
66  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 16.0 Programmable Outputs  
2,6 Fire Alarm Latching  
1,12  
Codepad Tamper – Access Denied  
This output operates when the wrong code is entered  
more times than allowed. The number of incorrect  
attempts allowed is programmed in Location 356  
(refer to Section 15.19 System Status – Access Denied on  
page 63). This output resets when a valid User Code  
is entered.  
This output operates when a 24-Hour Fire Zone is  
activated and resets when the system is armed or  
disarmed.  
2,7  
Fire Alarm Verification  
This feature is used on some commercial fire control  
panels to reduce false alarms from smoke detectors. It  
is very similar to zone pulse count used in some  
motion detectors. A fire zone is allotted a pulse count  
of 3 pulses over a period of 3 min.  
1,14  
Horn Speaker (Output 1 Only)  
This output operates only on Output 1. Use this  
output for one or two 8 Ω horn speakers. Refer to  
Section 17.9 Siren Run Time on page 71 and Section  
17.10 Siren Sound Rate on page 71 to program the  
speaker.  
If the smoke detector activates, the voltage to the  
smoke detector is disconnected for 15 sec and then  
reapplied. No alarm is registered.  
To enable monitoring of the horn speaker, select  
Option 2 in Location 424 (refer to Section 18.1 System  
Options 1 on page 73).  
If the unit activates again within 3 min of the first  
activation, no alarm is registered and the voltage to  
the smoke detector is again disconnected for 15 sec  
and then reapplied.  
1,15  
Sirens Running  
If a third activation is detected within 3 min of the  
first activation, (three pulses in 3 min) a fire alarm is  
registered. Power to the smoke detector is maintained  
to facilitate unit identification through the detector  
memory.  
This output operates for the duration of the Siren Run  
Time programmed in Location 411 (refer to Section  
17.9 Siren Run Time on page 71). When the sirens are  
activated, this output resets when the Siren Run Time  
expires. The relay output (Output 4) is set by default  
for this operation.  
Connect this output to the negative side of any fire or  
smoke detector. To configure an output for this  
feature, use these settings.  
2,0  
Strobe Operating  
This output operates when an alarm occurs and resets  
when a valid User Code is entered. The strobe output  
(Output 3) is set by default for strobe operation and is  
programmed to reset automatically after 8 hours.  
EVENT TYPE = 2,7  
POLARITY = 10  
TIMEBASE = 2  
MULTIPLIER = 15  
2,1  
Silent Alarm  
Program the zone to which the fire or smoke detector  
is connected as:  
This output operates when any zone programmed to  
activate silently. The output resets when the Siren  
Run Time expires, an audible alarm is activated, or a  
valid User Code is entered.  
ZONE TYPE = 13  
ZONE PULSE COUNT = 3  
ZONE PULSE COUNT TIME = 15  
2,2  
Alarm When in STAY Mode  
2,8  
2,9  
Remote Control 1  
Remote Control 2  
This output operates when an audible or silent alarm  
zone is activated when the system is armed in STAY  
Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2. The output resets when  
the system is disarmed.  
2,10 Remote Control 3  
These outputs can be remotely activated (turned on  
or off) by the following methods:  
2,3  
Alarm When in AWAY Mode  
Remote codepad (refer to Section 6.2.6 Turning  
Outputs On/Off on page 36 for more information).  
Remotely through the Alarm Link Software (refer  
to your Alarm Link Instruction Manual for more  
information).  
This output operates when an audible or silent zone  
alarm is activated when the system is armed in  
AWAY Mode. The output resets when the system is  
disarmed.  
2,4  
Mimic System Fault  
2,11  
Radio Control Output 1  
This output operates without any time delays when  
any system fault occurs, including an AC mains  
supply failure. The output resets when the system  
fault or the AC mains supply is restored.  
This output operates when the [DOOR] button on the  
four-channel hand-held transmitter is activated.  
2,12  
Radio Control Output 2  
This output operates when the [AUX] button on the  
four-channel hand-held transmitter is activated.  
2,5  
Fire Alarm Resetting  
This output operates when a 24-Hour Fire Zone is  
activated. The output resets when a valid User Code  
is entered or when Siren Run Time expires.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 16.0 Programmable Outputs  
2,13  
Radio Control Output 1 – Not in AWAY  
Mode  
3,5  
Mimic Zone 1  
Mimic Zone 2  
Mimic Zone 3  
Mimic Zone 4  
Mimic Zone 5  
Mimic Zone 6  
Mimic Zone 7  
Mimic Zone 8  
3,6  
This output operates when the [DOOR] button on the  
four-channel hand-held transmitter is activated. The  
output does not operate when the system is armed in  
AWAY Mode.  
3,7  
3,8  
3,9  
2,14  
Radio Control Output 2 – Not in AWAY  
Mode  
3,10  
3,11  
3,12  
This output operates when the [AUX] button on the  
four-channel hand-held transmitter is activated. The  
output does not operate when the system is armed in  
AWAY Mode.  
These output types mimic the zone inputs. The  
output operates when the zone is unsealed and resets  
when the zone is sealed. They operate regardless of  
the selected zone type (for example, a zone  
programmed as Not Used can still operate a mimic  
output). This feature operates when the system is  
armed or disarmed.  
2,15  
Communications Failure after Three  
Unsuccessful Calls  
This output operates after the communication dialer  
makes three unsuccessful calls to the base station  
receiver. The output resets when all messages are sent  
(that is, when the message buffer is empty or when all  
possible attempts are made).  
4,5  
Global Chime  
This output operates when any Chime zones are  
activated. The output resets when the zone is  
resealed. Refer to Section 14.3.1 Zone Types on page 55  
for more information.  
3,0  
Communications Failure  
This output operates after the communication dialer  
makes all possible attempts to reach the base station  
receiver. The output resets when the first kiss-off is  
received. This output does not operate for domestic  
formats.  
4,6  
Zone Not Sealed  
This output operates when a Burglary Zone is  
unsealed. Chime zones do not operate this output.  
4,7  
Zone Not Sealed after Exit Time  
3,1  
Dialer Disabled  
This output operates at the end of Exit Time if a  
Burglary Zone is unsealed. The output resets when all  
zones are sealed or the system is disarmed. Chime  
zones do not operate this output.  
This output operates when the Dialer reporting  
functions allowed Option 1 in Location 177 are not  
selected (refer to Section 12.1 Dialer Options 1 on  
page 50). The output resets when Option 1 is  
selected.  
4,9  
AC Mains 60 Hz or 50 Hz  
This output is activated when the AC mains supply  
frequency is 60 Hz. The output resets if the AC mains  
supply returns to 50 Hz.  
3,2  
Dialer Active  
This output operates when the communication dialer  
is online. The output resets when the communication  
dialer releases the telephone line.  
16.3 Output Polarity  
There are fifteen different polarities. Each polarity is  
designated by a number that you program into the  
third location for the output.  
3,3  
Ring Detect  
This output operates when the control panel detects  
an incoming call. The output resets when the ringing  
stops or when the call is answered.  
68  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 16.0 Programmable Outputs  
5 – Normally Open, One-Shot Low with Reset  
Table 54: Event Type Polarities  
This one-shot polarity is a normally-open circuit and  
switches to 0 V when the event occurs. Because the  
output switches back to an open circuit when the one-  
shot time expires or when the event returns to  
normal, the operation of the output can be shortened  
regardless of the programmed time parameter.  
Option  
Description  
0
1
2
Output not used  
Normally open, going low  
Normally open, pulsing low  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Normally open, one-shot low  
Normally open, one-shot low (can restart timer)  
Normally open, one-shot low (can reset)  
Normally open, one-shot low (alarm)  
Normally open, latching low  
6 – Normally Open, One-Shot Low with Alarm  
This one-shot polarity is a normally-open circuit and  
switches to 0 V when the event occurs. The output  
switches back to an open circuit when the one-shot  
time expires, when the event returns to normal, or  
when the system is disarmed.  
Normally low, going open  
Normally low, pulsing open  
This polarity is ideally suited for the operation of  
strobe lights because you can program the lights to  
reset (up to 99 hours) and prevent them from burning  
out or bothering others due to prolonged operation.  
Normally low, one-shot open  
Normally low, one-shot open (can restart timer)  
Normally low, one-shot open (can reset)  
Normally low, one-shot open (alarm)  
Normally low, latching open  
7 – Normally Open, Latching Low  
This polarity is a normally-open circuit and switches  
to 0 V when the event occurs. The output switches  
back to an open circuit when a user holds down [7]  
on the remote codepad until two beeps sound. Time  
parameters do not apply to this polarity.  
0 – Output Not Used  
If an output is not required, program the polarity as  
0.  
1 – Normally Open, Going Low  
8 – Normally Low, Going Open  
This polarity is a normally-open circuit and switches  
to 0 V when the event occurs. The output switches  
back to an open circuit when the event is restored.  
Time parameters do not apply to this polarity.  
This polarity is normally 0 V and switches to an open  
circuit when the event occurs. The output switches  
back to 0 V when the event ends. Time parameters  
do not apply to this polarity.  
2 – Normally Open, Pulsing Low  
9 – Normally Low, Pulsing Open  
This polarity is a normally-open circuit and switches  
to pulsing 0 V when the event occurs. The output  
switches back to an open circuit when the event is  
restored. Time parameters vary the On time of the  
pulse.  
This polarity is normally 0 V and switches to a  
pulsing open circuit when the event occurs. The  
output switches back to 0 V when the event ends.  
Time parameters vary the Off time of the pulse.  
10 – Normally Low, One-Shot Open  
3 – Normally Open, One-Shot Low  
This one-shot polarity is normally 0 V and switches to  
an open circuit when the event occurs. The output  
switches back to 0 V when the time parameter  
expires. This one-shot time setting always runs its full  
duration and cannot be manually reset.  
This one-shot polarity is a normally-open circuit and  
switches to 0 V when the event occurs. The output  
switches back to an open circuit when the time  
parameter setting expires. This one-shot time setting  
always runs its full duration and cannot be manually  
reset.  
11 – Normally Low, One-Shot Open with Reactivate  
4 – Normally Open, One-Shot Low with Reactivate  
This one-shot polarity is normally 0 V and switches to  
an open circuit when the event occurs. Every time the  
event occurs, it restarts the one-shot timer. The output  
switches back to 0 V when the one-shot time expires.  
This one-shot polarity is a normally-open circuit and  
switches to 0 V when the event occurs. Every time  
the event occurs, it restarts the one-shot timer. The  
output switches back to an open circuit when the one-  
shot time expires.  
12 – Normally Low, One-Shot Open with Reset  
This one-shot polarity is normally 0 V and switches to  
an open circuit when the event occurs. Because the  
output switches back to 0 V when the one-shot time  
expires or when the event returns to normal, the one-  
shot timer can be shortened regardless of the time  
setting.  
This polarity is ideally suited for lighting control. You  
can use a PIR to activate an output to turn on lights.  
Whenever there is movement, the PIR reactivates the  
output and lengthens the time the lights remain on.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 17.0 System Event Timers  
13 – Normally Low, One-Shot Open with Alarm  
Table 56: Pulsing Time Settings  
This one-shot polarity is normally 0 V and switches to  
an open circuit when the event occurs. Because the  
output switches back to 0 V when the one-shot time  
expires, when the event returns to normal, or when  
the system is disarmed, the one-shot timer can be  
shortened regardless of the time setting.  
On Time  
Off Time  
Increments  
Tolerance  
200 ms  
200 ms to  
19.8 sec  
200 ms  
200 ms  
1 sec  
1 min  
1 hour  
1 to 99 sec  
1 to 99 min  
1 to 99 hr  
1 sec  
1 min  
1 hr  
1 sec  
1 min  
hr  
14 – Normally Low, Latching Open  
This polarity is normally 0 V and switches to an open  
circuit when the event occurs. The output switches  
back to 0 V when the user holds down [7] on the  
remote codepad until two beeps sound. Time  
parameters do not apply to this polarity.  
16.6 One-Shot Polarities  
The duration, or On time, of an output is the product  
of the time base and the multiplier.  
If you want an output to operate for 5 sec, program  
the time settings as:  
16.4 Output Timing  
The timing of outputs is calculated by the time base  
and a multiplier. These two values play different roles  
depending on the selected polarity. When you  
program outputs to pulse, you can set both the On  
and Off times. You can program one-shot polarities  
to operate from 200 ms to 99 hours.  
Time Base: 2  
Multiplier: 0 5  
The On time is calculated by multiplying the time  
base setting (1 sec) by the multiplier value (05) (for  
example, 1 x 05 = 5 sec).  
Table 57: One-Shot Time Settings  
The maximum value you can program in  
the two multiplier locations is 9,9.  
On Time  
Increments  
200 ms  
1 sec  
1 min  
1 hr  
Tolerance  
200 ms  
1 sec  
1 min  
hour  
Table 55: Time Base Settings  
200 ms to 19.8 sec  
1 to 99 sec  
1 to 99 min  
1 to 99 hr  
Option  
Description  
200 ms  
1 sec  
1 minute  
1 hour  
1
2
3
4
17.0 System Event Timers  
This section covers the features that involve timing,  
such as Entry and Exit Times, Sensor Watch Time,  
Siren Run Time, and System Date and Time.  
You can only set the time base settings to one of the  
values listed in Table 55. The multiplier value is a two-  
digit decimal number from 00 to 99. For greater  
accuracy, use 60 sec for 1-minute intervals and 60  
min for one-hour intervals.  
17.1 Programming Entry/Exit Timers  
There are two programming locations for Entry  
Timer 1, Entry Timer 2, Exit Time For AWAY  
Mode, and Entry Guard Time For STAY Mode.  
16.5 Pulsing Polarities  
The first location of the timer allows you to set the  
timer in increments of 1 sec. The second location  
allows you to set the timer in increments of 16 sec.  
Add these two locations together for the total time.  
When programming pulsing polarities, you must set  
both the On and Off times. The duration, or On time,  
for an output is determined by the time base selected  
from one of the options in Table 55. In other words,  
there are only four possible On times.  
Example  
The Off time is calculated by multiplying the On time To set the Entry Time to 18 sec, program Location  
by a decimal number between 00 and 99. If you want  
an output to operate for 200 ms every 5 sec, program  
the time settings as:  
410 as 2 (2 x 1 sec = 2 sec) and Location 411 as 1 (1 x  
16 sec = 16 sec) for a total time of 18 sec (2 + 16 =  
18).  
On Time: 1  
Off Time: 2 5  
17.2 Entry Timer 1  
Program Entry Timer 1 into Locations 398  
(increments of 1 sec) and 399 (increments of 16 sec).  
The default value for Entry Timer 1 is 20 sec (4 1).  
70  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 17.0 System Event Timers  
You can program Entry Timer 1 from 0 to 255 sec in  
increments of 1 sec. Entry Timer 1 is the delay time  
used by the Delay-1 Zones. Refer to Section 14.3.1  
Zone Types on page 55 for more information.  
These locations program the time in sec that a  
delayed report waits dormant in the dial buffer before  
it is sent to the receiving party. If a User Code holder  
resets the alarm within this time frame, the control  
panel clears the dialer buffer and does not report the  
alarm to the receiving party. Refer to Section 14.3.4  
Zone Options 1 on page 57 to program zones for delay  
alarm reporting.  
17.3 Entry Timer 2  
Program Entry Timer 1 into Locations 400  
(increments of 1 sec) and 401 (increments of 16 sec).  
The default value for Entry Timer 2 is 40 sec (8 2).  
17.7 Sensor Watch Time  
You can program Entry Timer 2 from 0 to 255 sec in  
increments of 1 sec. Entry Timer 2 is the delay time  
used by Delay-2 Zones. Refer to Section 14.3.1 Zone  
Types on page 55 for more information.  
Program Sensor Watch Time into Locations 408  
(increments of days, tens digit) and 409 (increments of  
days, units digit).  
The default value for the Sensor Watch Time is 0.  
17.4 Exit Time  
Program Exit Timer into Locations 402 (increments  
of 1 sec) and 403 (increments of 16 sec).  
The time set in these two locations determines the  
number of days (0 to 99) a zone can remain sealed  
before registering as a fault. This feature is active only  
when the system is disarmed. If a zone programmed  
for Sensor Watch is not unsealed and reset during this  
time, the FAULT indicator lights. Refer to Section 4.13  
Fault Descriptions on page 22 for more information on  
Sensor Watch Faults. Refer to Section 14.3.4 Zone  
Options 1 on page 57 for programming zones for  
Sensor Watch.  
The default value for the Exit Timer is 60 sec (12 3).  
You can program the Exit Timer from 0 to 255 sec in  
increments of 1 sec. When arming the system in  
AWAY Mode, the remote codepad beeps during Exit  
Time until the final 10 sec, when the codepad sounds  
one continuous beep to indicate the end of Exit Time  
is near.  
The Sensor Watch Time counter is active only when  
the control panel is disarmed. If the system is  
disarmed for 8 hours a day and the Sensor Watch  
Time is programmed for 1 day, a zone programmed  
for Sensor Watch registers a Sensor Watch Fault if it  
is not activated while disarmed within 3 days.  
The remote codepad always sounds one short beep at  
the end of Exit Time when arming in STAY Mode 1  
or STAY Mode 2.  
17.5 Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode  
Program Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode into  
Locations 404 (increments of 1 sec) and 405  
(increments of 16 sec).  
The default value for Entry Guard Timer for STAY  
Mode is 0.  
This feature is useful, for example, when someone  
places objects in the view of a motion detector,  
preventing the detector from picking up movement.  
17.8 Codepad Lockout Time  
Program the Codepad Lockout Time into  
Location 410 (increments of 10 sec).  
Entry Guard Timer for STAY Mode is the delay time  
used for all zones except 24-Hour Burglary and 24-  
Hour Fire Zones when the system is armed in STAY  
Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2. All zones, including Delay  
Zones, use this timer for the entry delay (for example,  
the Entry Guard Timer overrides the delay time  
programmed for a Delay Zone). If the Entry Guard  
Timer is programmed as 0, each zone acts according  
to its programmed zone type.  
The default value for the Code Lockout Time is 0.  
All codepads are locked out for the programmed time  
if an invalid code is entered more times than allowed  
by the code retry attempts programmed in  
Location 356 (refer to Section 15.19 System Status –  
Access Denied on page 63). If the Codepad Lockout  
Time is programmed as 0, codepad lockout does not  
occur.  
17.6 Delay Alarm Reporting Time  
Program the Delay Alarm Reporting Time into  
Locations 406 (increments of 1 sec) and 407  
(increments of 16 sec).  
The default value for the Delay Alarm Reporting  
Time is 0.  
17.9 Siren Run Time  
Program the Siren Run Time into Location 411  
(increments of 1 minute).  
The default value for the Siren Run Time is 5.  
The Siren Run Time determines how long the horn  
speaker operates during an alarm. You can program  
the Siren Run Time from 0 to 15 min.  
17.10 Siren Sound Rate  
Program the Siren Sound Rate into Location 412.  
The default value for the Siren Sound Rate is 7.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 17.0 System Event Timers  
The Siren Sound Rate varies the frequency of the  
17.13 Auto Disarming Time  
Program the Auto Disarming Time in Locations 418  
to 421 as described in Table 59.  
siren tone slowest (0) and to fastest (15). The Siren  
Sound Rate does not change the frequency of the fire  
alarm tone.  
The default value is midnight (0 0 0 0).  
17.11 Auto Arming Pre-Alert Timer  
Table 59: Auto Disarming Time Parameters  
Program the Auto Arming Pre-Alert Timer into  
Location 413 (increments of 5 min).  
The default value for the Auto Arming Pre-Alert  
Timer is 1 (5 min).  
Location  
418  
419  
420  
421  
Parameter  
Default  
Hour of day (tens digit)  
Hour of day (units digit)  
Minute of day (tens digit)  
Minute of day (units digit)  
0
0
0
0
This location sets the time period during which the  
control panel warns you it is automatically armed in  
AWAY Mode. The codepad beeps once every second  
until the Pre-Alert Timer expires: the system then  
automatically arms itself in AWAY Mode. If you  
want the system to automatically arm in STAY Mode  
1, select Option 4 in Location 428 (refer to Section  
18.5 Consumer Options 1 on page 75).  
These locations specify the time of day that the  
system automatically disarms itself. Set this time in  
24-hour format (for example, program 10:30 PM as  
2230).  
User Code 16 is reported when this feature is used.  
After the control panel automatically arms in AWAY  
Mode or STAY Mode 1, Exit Time starts. If a valid  
User Code is entered during the Pre-Alert Time, the  
Auto Arming Time programmed in Locations 414 to  
417 (refer to Section 17.12 Auto Arming Time) is  
extended by 1 hour.  
17.14 Kiss-Off Wait Time  
Program the Kiss-Off Wait Time into Location 422  
(increments of 500 millisec).  
The default value for the Kiss-Off Wait Time is 3  
(1500 ms).  
If you want a programmable output to operate during  
the Auto Arming Pre-Alert Time, use Output Event  
Type 0,5 Auto Arm Pre-Arming Alert Time (refer to  
page 65).  
This location sets the time that the control panel waits  
for acknowledgment before resending a report. This  
timer applies only to the 4 + 2 Express Format.  
17.12 Auto Arming Time  
Program the Auto Arming Time in Locations 414 to  
417 as described in Table 58.  
17.15 System Time  
Program the System Time in Locations 901 to 904 as  
described in Table 60.  
The default value is midnight (0 0 0 0).  
The default value is 0 0 0 0.  
Table 58: Auto Arming Time Parameters  
Table 60: System Time Parameters  
Location  
414  
415  
416  
417  
Parameter  
Default  
Location  
901  
902  
903  
904  
Parameter  
Default  
Hour of day (tens digit)  
Hour of day (units digit)  
Minute of day (tens digit)  
Minute of day (units digit)  
0
0
0
0
Hour of day (tens digit)  
Hour of day (units digit)  
Minute of day (tens digit)  
Minute of day (units digit)  
0
0
0
0
These locations specify the time of the day that the  
system automatically arms itself in AWAY Mode. Set  
this time in 24-hour format (for example, program  
10:30 PM as 2230). If you want the system to arm in  
STAY Mode 1, select Option 4 in Location 428 (refer  
to Section 18.5 Consumer Options 1 on page 75).  
The ICP-CC404 Control Panel has a real-time  
24-hour clock you must set during installation. Set  
this time in 24-hour HHMM format (for example,  
program 10:30 PM as 2230). You must reset the  
System Time every time power is removed from the  
system.  
If forced arming is disabled for any zone, the  
automatic arming feature operates regardless of  
whether any zones are unsealed. Refer to Section  
14.3.6 Zone Options 2 on page 58 for more information  
on programming zones for forced arming.  
A Master Code holder can also set the System Date  
and Time (refer to Section 6.2.7 Setting the Date and  
Time on page 36).  
17.16 System Date  
Program the System Date in Locations 905 to 910 as  
described in Table 61.  
User Code 16 is reported when this feature is used.  
The default value is 01 January, 2001 (0 1 0 1 0 1).  
72  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 18.0 System and Consumer Options  
4 – Strobe Indications for Radio Arm/Disarm  
Table 61: System Date Parameters  
This option allows the strobe to indicate when the  
system is armed and disarmed when remotely  
operating the system using the WE800E Wireless  
Location  
905  
906  
907  
908  
Parameter  
Default  
Day of the month (tens digit)  
Day of the month (units digit)  
Month of the year (tens digit)  
Month of the year (units digit)  
Current year (tens digit)  
Current year (units digit)  
0
1
0
1
0
1
On/Off Interface. Refer to Table 62.  
Table 62: Strobe Indications for Remote  
Operations  
909  
910  
Strobe Duration  
3 sec  
System Status  
The ICP-CC404 Control Panel has a real-time  
System disarmed  
12-month calendar you must set during installation,  
and reset every time power is removed from the  
system.  
6 sec  
6 sec  
System armed in AWAY Mode  
System armed in STAY Mode 1  
8 – Horn Speaker Beeps for Radio Arm/Disarm  
A Master Code holder can also set the System Date  
and Time (refer to Section 6.2.7 Setting the Date and  
Time on page 36).  
This option enables the horn speaker to sound when  
the system is armed or disarmed remotely using the  
WE800E Wireless On/Off Interface. Refer to Table  
63.  
18.0 System and Consumer  
Options  
The locations in this section have up to four options.  
You can select any combination of these options by  
programming a single value. Calculate this value by  
adding the option bit numbers together. Refer to  
Section 2.3 Programming Option Bits on page 10 for  
more information.  
Table 63: Horn Speaker Indication Beeps for  
Remote Operations  
Beeps  
System Status  
1
System disarmed  
2
System armed in AWAY Mode  
System armed in STAY Mode 1  
1 two-tone beep  
18.1 System Options 1  
Program the selected System Options 1 in  
Location 424.  
The default value is 1.  
18.2 System Options 2  
Program the selected System Options 2 in  
Location 425.  
The options are:  
The default value is 0.  
1 – Smart Lockout Allowed  
The options are:  
This feature allows the control panel to remove any  
zones that are programmed for lockout dialer from  
the lockout list when the sirens are running. This  
feature allows a monitoring station to receive zone  
alarm reports from previously locked out zones  
during siren time. Refer to Section 14.3.4 Zone  
Options 1 on page 57 for information on programming  
zones for lockout dialer and lockout siren.  
1 – Silent Codepad Panic  
If this option is selected, a Codepad Panic Alarm or  
Radio Remote Panic Alarm does not operate the  
horn speaker, the bell, or the strobe outputs. If this  
option is not selected, all three outputs operate after a  
Codepad Panic Alarm is activated when a user  
presses [1] and [3] or [STAY] and [AWAY] at the  
same time on the remote codepad. Selecting this  
option does not affect the operation of the  
communication dialer.  
Refer to Section 14.5 Swinger Shutdown Count for Dialer  
on page 59 to program the number of times the zone  
can send a report before being locked out.  
If you want to disable reporting of a Codepad Panic  
Alarm, program Locations 337 and 338 as 0 (refer to  
Section 15.9 Codepad Panic Report on page 61).  
2 – Horn Speaker Monitor  
If this option is selected, the control panel detects  
when the horn speaker is disconnected from the  
speaker terminals. The FAULT indicator lights when  
the horn speaker is disconnected and turns off when  
the horn speaker is reconnected.  
2 – Silent Codepad Fire  
If this option is selected, a Codepad Fire Alarm does  
not operate the horn speaker, the bell, or the strobe  
outputs. If this option is not selected, all three outputs  
operate after a Codepad Fire Alarm is activated when  
a user presses [4] and [6] at the same time on the  
remote codepad. Selecting this option does not affect  
the operation of the communication dialer.  
If an output must operate when the horn speaker is  
disconnected, use Output Event Type 1,6 Horn  
Speaker Monitor Fail (refer to this option on page 66  
for more information).  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 18.0 System and Consumer Options  
If you want to disable the reporting of a Codepad  
Fire Alarm, program Locations 339 and 340 as 0  
(refer to Section 15.10 Codepad Fire Report on page 61).  
2 – Ignore AC Fail  
If this option is selected, the MAINS indicator does  
not flash and the codepad does not beep every  
minute when the AC mains is disconnected from the  
control panel. If you want a programmable output to  
operate when the AC mains fails, use Output Event  
Type 1,4 AC Fail (refer to page 66).  
4 – Silent Codepad Medical  
If this option is selected, a Codepad Medical Alarm  
does not operate the horn speaker, the bell, or the  
strobe outputs. If this option is not selected, all three  
outputs operate after a Codepad Medical Alarm is  
activated when a user presses [7] and [9] at the same  
time on the remote codepad. Selecting this option  
does not affect the communication dialer operation.  
If this option is selected, an AC Loss report (Contact  
ID Event Code 301) still reports to the base station  
receiver unless Locations 348 and 349 are  
programmed as 0 (refer to Section 15.15 System Status –  
AC Fail Report on page 62).  
To disable the reporting of a Codepad Medical  
Alarm, program Locations 341 and 342 as 0 (refer to  
Section 15.11 Codepad Medical Report on page 62).  
4 – Zone Pulse Count Handover  
If this option is selected, any zone pulse count  
readings are handed over and accumulate to any zone  
that is activated during the same arming cycle. Zone  
pulse count handover only operates with zone pulse  
count options 8 to 15. Refer to Section 14.3.2 Zone  
Pulse Count on page 56 and Section 14.3.3 Zone Pulse  
Count Time on page 56 for more information.  
8 – Silent Access Denied (Code Retries)  
If this option is selected, a Codepad Tamper Alarm  
does not operate the horn speaker, bell, or the strobe  
outputs. If this option is not selected, all three outputs  
operate after a Codepad Tamper Alarm occurs.  
Refer to Section 15.19 System Status – Access Denied on  
page 63 to set the number of invalid code retries that  
causes an alarm condition. Selecting this option does  
not affect the operation of the communication dialer.  
If you want to disable the reporting of Access Denied  
reports, program Locations 357 and 358 as 0.  
24-Hour Zones can receive any handover  
pulses from other zones. 24-Hour Zones  
cannot hand over pulses to other zones.  
8 – Sequential Handover Delay  
If this option is selected, handover delay is sequential  
(that is, in numerical order from lowest to highest). If  
the sequence is broken before the Entry Time  
expires, an alarm occurs. If this option is not selected,  
handover delay follows the entry path if a Delay Zone  
is activated first. Refer to Section 14.3.1 Zone Types on  
page 55 for more information about Handover Zones.  
18.3 System Options 3  
Program the selected System Options 3 in  
Location 426.  
The default value is 8.  
The options are:  
1 – AC Fail after 1 Hour  
18.4 System Options 4  
Program the selected System Options 4 in  
Location 427.  
If this option is selected, the MAINS indicator flashes  
when the AC mains supply is disconnected. An AC  
Loss signal (Contact ID Event Code 301) is sent to  
the base station receiver after the AC mains supply is  
disconnected continuously for longer than 60 min.  
The default value is 0.  
The options are:  
If this option is not selected, the MAINS indicator  
flashes and an AC Loss signal (Contact ID Event  
Code 301) is sent to the base station receiver after the  
AC mains power is disconnected continuously for 2  
min.  
1 – Panel Powers Up Disarmed  
If this option is selected, the control panel starts in the  
disarmed state when the battery and AC mains are  
reconnected after power is removed from the system.  
If this option is not selected, the system always starts  
armed in AWAY Mode.  
The MAINS indicator stops flashing when the AC  
mains supply is restored for longer than 2 min.  
2 – Arm/Disarm Tracking on Power Up  
An AC Loss Restore Report is sent to the base station  
receiver after the AC mains supply is restored  
continuously for more than 2 min regardless of if this  
option is selected.  
If selected, the control panel keeps its current armed  
status in non-volatile memory. If the control panel is  
restarted due to a power failure, the control panel  
returns to being armed or disarmed as it was before  
the power failed.  
Example  
If the system is disarmed when power is removed  
from the system, the system returns to the disarmed  
state when power is reapplied to the system.  
74  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 18.0 System and Consumer Options  
You can turn Day Alarm on and off by holding down  
[4] for 2 sec. Three beeps indicate Day Alarm is  
turned on and two beeps indicate Day Alarm is  
turned off. Refer to Section 14.1.3 Day Alarm Operation  
on page 53 for more information.  
4 – Internal Crystal Keeps Time  
If this option is selected, the control panel uses the  
internal crystal (XTAL) to track time. This option is  
useful in countries that do not have a constant mains  
frequency. If this option is not selected, the control  
panel uses the mains frequency as a time base to keep  
time.  
18.6 Consumer Options 2  
Program the selected Consumer Options 2 in  
Location 429.  
8 – Night Arm Station, or RE005/E Installed  
The default value is 2.  
Select this option to use the RE005/E 2-Channel  
Radio Interface, or the CP105A Night Arm Station.  
This option enables any of these three accessories to  
operate the control panel. User Code 16 is used to  
send Open and Close Reports when you use any of  
these accessories.  
The options are:  
1 – Codepad Display Turn off after 60 Sec  
If this option is selected, all indicators on the remote  
codepad display turn off if a button is not pressed for  
60 sec. The indicators lights again when there is an  
alarm (except a silent alarm), when a button is  
pressed on the codepad, when the AC mains fail  
beeps, or if the Entry Timer is activated.  
18.5 Consumer Options 1  
Program the selected Consumer Options 1 in  
Location 428.  
The default value is 0.  
2 – Single Button Arming Allowed  
The options are:  
If this option is selected, the hold-down functions for  
arming in AWAY Mode, STAY Mode 1 and STAY  
Mode 2 are functional. Refer to Section 6.3 Hold-Down  
Functions on page 37 for more information.  
1 – Test Reports Only When Armed  
If this option is selected, Test Reports (Contact ID  
Event Code 602) are only sent when the system is  
armed. It is no longer necessary to send a Test Report  
with an Opening and Closing Report every day.  
4 – Single Button Disarming Allowed  
This option operates only when Option 2 in this  
location is also selected. This option allows hold-  
down functions for disarming from STAY Mode 1  
and STAY Mode 2. Refer to Section 6.3 Hold-Down  
Functions on page 37 for more information.  
Most commercial premises are open during the  
working week, so a Test Report is not necessary  
because Open and Close Reports are sent at the  
programmed time. If you want to manually send a  
Test Report, press and hold [9] until two beeps sound.  
8 – Alarm Memory Reset on Disarm  
Refer to Section 15.21 Test Reporting Time on page 63  
to set the desired Test Report Time. To set the first  
Test Report, refer to Section 6.1.1 Set the Number of  
Days until the First Test Report on page 27.  
If this option is selected, the alarm events memory  
clears from the remote codepad when the system is  
disarmed. If this option is not selected, the system  
must be armed and disarmed again to clear alarm  
memory from the remote codepad.  
2 – Test Report after Siren Reset  
Select this option to force the control panel to send a  
Test Report after the siren resets. This can be used to  
indicate to the monitoring station that the control  
panel itself was not tampered with during the alarm  
period.  
18.7 Consumer Options 3  
Program the selected Consumer Options 3 in  
Location 430.  
The default value is 5.  
The options are:  
4 – Auto Arm in STAY Mode 1  
1 – Codepad Fault Alarms Beep  
Select this option if automatic arming in STAY Mode  
1 is preferred to automatic arming in AWAY Mode.  
If this option is selected, the FAULT indicator flashes  
and the codepad beeps once every minute until the  
user acknowledges a system fault. To acknowledge a  
new fault and stop the codepad from beeping once  
every minute, press [AWAY].  
Program the time the control panel automatically  
arms itself in Locations 414 to 417 (refer to Section  
17.12 Auto Arming Time on page 72). Set the Auto  
Arming Pre-Alert Time in Location 413 (refer to  
Section 17.11 on page 72).  
If this option is not selected, only the codepad  
FAULT indicator flashes when a new fault occurs and  
the codepad does not beep once every minute.  
8 – STAY Indicator Shows Day Alarm Status  
If this option is selected, the STAY indicator flashes  
once every 3 sec when Day Alarm is enabled.  
2 – Digit 3 for Codepad Duress Instead of 9  
If this option is selected, a user can add 3 (instead of a  
9) to the code used to disarm the system to activate a  
Duress Alarm.  
Specify Day Alarm zones in Location 265 (refer to  
Section 14.1 Day Alarm Information on page 53).  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 19.0 Optional Equipment  
4 – Alarms Activate Sirens and Strobe Outputs in  
STAY Modes 1 and 2  
Figure 10: WE800E Wireless ON/OFF Interface  
Select this option if audible alarms are required when  
the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or 2.  
18.8 Radio Input Options  
Program the selected Radio Input Options in  
Location 431.  
The default value is 0.  
The options are:  
1 – Radio Receiver (WE800E)  
Select this option to use the WE800E 433 MHz RF  
Receiver for remote operations using radio remote  
hand-held transmitters.  
1 – Direct link cable  
2 – Receiver interface connection  
3 – Wireless ON/OFF Interface  
4 – Red  
2 – Latching Keyswitch Input  
Selecting this option allows you to connect a latching  
keyswitch to the P5 terminals D and GND to  
remotely arm and disarm the system in AWAY  
Mode.  
5 – Black  
6 – Termination for phone line  
7 – Socket for telecom lead connection  
19.3 RE005E Two-Channel Radio  
Interface  
The two-channel radio interface allows customers to  
operate Control Panels remotely and to control two  
on-board relays. The interface can be used as a stand-  
alone receiver, independent of a Control Panel, used  
solely for remote control of external devices  
3 – Momentary Keyswitch Input  
Selecting this option allows you to connect a  
momentary keyswitch to the P5 terminals D and  
GND to remotely arm and disarm the system in  
AWAY Mode.  
19.0 Optional Equipment  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. manufactures a number  
of accessories that can be used with the ICP-CC404  
Control Panel. These optional pieces of equipment  
enhance certain features making the system extremely  
flexible.  
connected to the two on-board relays.  
The interface’s operating frequency is 433 MHz with  
the ability to store up to 120 radio remote codes.  
Connect the interface to a Control Panel using a  
three-wire connection in parallel with the codepad  
and select Option 8 in Location 427 (refer to Section  
18.4 System Options 4 on page 74).  
19.1 RE012E/RE013E 2-Channel/  
4-Channel Hand-Held Transmitters  
433 MHz  
19.4 CC891 Programming Key  
These hand-held radio transmitters can be used with  
the RE005E 433 MHz RF Receiver to operate the  
system remotely. Both hand-held transmitters can  
remotely arm and disarm the system in AWAY Mode  
or STAY Mode 1 and can activate remote Panic  
Alarms. The four-channel hand-held transmitter can  
also operate outputs such as garage doors, swimming  
pool pumps, or outside lights.  
The programming key copies and stores all  
information programmed in your control panel. The  
programming key can hold all your common  
configuration data such as monitoring station  
telephone numbers and zone reporting channels.  
19.5 CC816 Alarm Link Software  
This software can program the ICP-CC404 Control  
Panel by either the direct link or remote connect  
methods. This software can access all options and  
features and maintain history and service reports.  
Program options to use this feature in Location 180  
(refer to Section 8.2 Alarm Link Options on page 40).  
Refer to Section 8.0 Alarm Link Software on page 39 for  
more information on using Alarm Link Software.  
19.2 WE800E 433 MHz RF Receiver  
This interface allows the use of up to eight radio User  
Codes (9 to 16). This is useful if you want the system  
to be radio controlled and you would like to give  
your customer total control using a radio hand-held  
remote transmitter.  
19.6 CP5 Eight Zone LED Codepad  
(CP508W)  
This codepad operates with the range of control  
panels. It provides indications for up to eight zones.  
76  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 19.0 Optional Equipment  
19.7 CP5 Eight Zone LCD Codepad  
(CP508LW)  
This codepad operates with the range of control  
panels. This codepad has a fixed icon display and  
provides indications for up to eight zones.  
19.8 CP105A Night Arm Station  
The night arm station has a panic button and allows  
the user to arm and disarm the system in STAY  
Mode 1 from a bedroom or sitting room. Enable the  
night arm station to operate with the system by  
selecting Option 8 in Location 427 (refer to Section  
18.4 System Options 4 on page 74).  
19.9 PS101 Power Supply Module  
The PS101 Power Supply Module provides 13.8 VDC  
at currents up to 1 A. Use the module with the TF008  
18 VAC plug pack.  
The module provides standard, fully short-circuit  
proof, power out, and battery charging terminals, and  
a DC LED indicator. If the application requires an  
uninterruptible power supply, a rechargeable sealed  
lead-acid battery can be installed. If there is a mains  
failure, the power supply switches to battery power  
without interrupting the supply to the load.  
19.10 TF008 Plug Pack (TF008)  
The TF008 plug pack is used with control panels. The  
plug pack includes built-in thermal fuses that blow  
during overload or fault conditions to eliminate a  
possible fire threat due to excessive heat buildup  
inside the casing.  
The plug pack incorporates a three-wire flying lead  
that enables a mains earth connection between the  
equipment and the plug pack. This connection might  
be required for lightning protection on equipment  
connected to phone lines or for safety reasons such as  
earthing of metal enclosures.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 20.0 Terminals and Descriptions  
20.0 Terminals and Descriptions  
20.1 Terminal Descriptions  
Table 64: Terminal Descriptions  
Terminal  
Description  
EARTH  
Connect this terminal to the green wire on the TF008 Plug Pack that is internally connected  
to mains earth. Because extensive lightning protection is built into the control panel, this  
terminal must be connected correctly to take advantage of this protection.  
18 VAC  
These two terminals are plug-on type, and are the termination point for the TF008 Plug Pack.  
To ensure correct operation, the voltage of the plug pack must be 18 VAC to 22 VAC at 1.3  
A (minimum).  
+BATTERY  
–BATTERY  
The +BATTERY terminal connects to the red positive terminal of the battery and the –  
BATTERY terminal connects to the black negative terminal of the battery. The battery should  
be a 12 VDC sealed lead-acid rechargeable type with a capacity from 1.2 Ah to 6.5 Ah. The  
battery is protected by a 2.5 A PTC.  
The charging globe situated above the 2.5 A PTC lights until the battery is 100% charged.  
GND  
+12V  
CLK  
This group of terminals provides the connection points for the system codepads. Connect all  
system codepads in parallel back to these terminals. The only factor restricting the number of  
codepads you can connect is the available power and its distribution. Because each  
codepad has a maximum power requirement of 60 mA with all indicators lit, consider this in  
calculating your available continuous power. The total continuous external load cannot  
exceed 1 A.  
DATA  
STR  
OUT 1  
+COM  
These terminals are the output terminals. You can configure the outputs to any combination  
of the functions available through the system programming options. You can use them for a  
variety of functions with considerable flexibility. All outputs have a common +12 VDC terminal  
and each output can sink up to 400 mA. By default, Output 1 operates a horn speaker.  
This group of terminals is protected by the solid-state Integrated Protection System (IPS). IPS  
tolerates abuse or incorrect wiring. Each open collector output does not use any current, but  
can provide up to 400 mA.  
COMM  
N/O  
These relay contacts are fully programmable similar to the strobe and Output 1. By default,  
they are alarm output (Sirens Running – Output Event Type 1,15).  
The NO contact is the connection point for the positive side of a DC siren, such as a piezo  
screamer. The negative side of the DC siren connects to the GND terminal. The PCB  
provides a link (JP2) to connect the COM terminal to either GND or +12 V. Connect this link  
to +12 V as shown in Figure 11 on page 81. The relay is rated at 1 A at 30 VDC.  
+12V  
Z4  
Z3  
Use these terminals for Zones 3 and 4. The common terminal is +12V. Connect all normally-  
closed contacts in series with the EOL resistor and connect all normally-open contacts in  
parallel with the EOL resistor. The function of the zones and their response times are  
configured using the system programming options. If split EOL is programmed, 24-Hour  
Zones or Keyswitch Zones connected in parallel to Zones 3 and 4 act as Zones 7 and 8.  
+12V  
GND  
Use these two terminals to provide power to detectors and other equipment. They are  
protected by the 1 A PTC.  
Z2  
Z1  
+12V  
Use these terminals for Zones 1 and 2. The common terminal is +12V. Connect all normally-  
closed contacts in series with the EOL resistor and connect all normally-open contacts in  
parallel with the EOL resistor. The function of the zones and their response times are  
configured using the system programming options. If split EOL is programmed, 24-Hour  
Zones or Keyswitch Zones connected in parallel to Zones 1 and 2 act as Zones 5 and 6.  
78  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 20.0 Terminals and Descriptions  
20.2 Glossary Of Terms  
Table 65: Glossary  
Term  
Description  
24-hour zone  
A monitored input where tamper switches and emergency switches can be connected.  
If one of these switches is violated at any time (whether the system is armed or  
disarmed), an alarm is reported.  
alarm condition  
The status when an alarm system is armed and one of the detection devices is violated.  
A 24-Hour zone (for example, a smoke detector) can activate when the system is  
armed or disarmed.  
answering machine  
bypass  
A condition that enables connection with the control panel for remote arming or remote  
programming operations when there is an answering machine or facsimile machine on  
the same telephone line.  
Armed (System ON) A status in which the system is ready to accept alarms.  
automatic arming Programming that allows the system to arm automatically at the same time each day in  
AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1.  
automatic disarming Programming that allows the system to disarm automatically at the same time each day  
in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1.  
AWAY or #  
AWAY Mode  
codepad  
A codepad button used to execute any given command.  
The mode used to arm your system when you leave your premises.  
A device that allows you to perform all functions such as arming, disarming, and  
programming of your alarm system.  
day alarm  
detector  
Programming that allows a combination of zones to be monitored while the system is  
disarmed.  
A unit installed as a satellite component in a security system designed to detect an  
intruder within a protected area. Some common forms of detection devices are passive  
infrared, smoke, photo electric beams, reed switches, and vibration sensors.  
dialer  
An electronic device that uses tones or pulses to dial an electronic receiver such as a  
monitoring station, mobile phone, or pocket pager. It uses the public switched  
telephone network to send alarm or supervisory signals.  
disarmed  
A system status that does not accept alarms, except for 24-hour zones.  
dual reporting  
Reporting that allows your control panel to transmit alarm signals in two different  
reporting formats (for example, the control panel can transmit to a monitoring station  
and to a mobile phone, or to two different monitoring stations).  
dynamic battery  
testing  
A method used to monitor and test the condition of your backup battery.  
EDMSAT satellite  
siren  
A self-contained siren unit complete with flashing blue strobe light and a backup  
battery that provides a higher level of security for an alarm system.  
entry delay  
A programmed delay of the system alarm responses that allows a person to enter a  
building through the entry door to turn the system off.  
entry warning  
exit delay  
The beeping from a codepad during an entry delay as a reminder to disarm the system.  
A programmed delay of the system alarm responses that allows a person to leave a  
building after turning the system on.  
external equipment  
force arming  
Any device connected to a security system, such as a detector, codepad, or siren.  
A method of overriding the safety feature that prevents arming with a faulted zone on a  
control panel.  
hand-over delay  
If a system is armed and Zone 1 is violated, the entry delay starts timing. If Zone 2 is  
violated, the entry delay time is handed over to the Zone 2 and so on, to Zones 3 and  
4. This is known as sequential hand-over delay.  
hand-held radio  
remote control  
A device used to arm and disarm a security system or to cause a panic alarm.  
lockout dialer  
lockout siren  
A dialer that activates only once per zone per arming cycle.  
A siren that activates only once per zone per arming cycle.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 20.0 Terminals and Descriptions  
Table 65: (continued)  
Term  
Description  
master code  
A numeric code used for arming and disarming the system, and for allowing access to  
all functions available through the codepad.  
monitoring station  
A secure location where a digital receiver monitors a number of alarm systems and  
deciphers their alarm transmission reports so the operator can advise the appropriate  
authorities to take immediate action.  
panic  
A condition or type of alarm in which the user requires either immediate police or  
medical assistance.  
phone controller  
A device used to arm a security system over the telephone line, and to acknowledge  
domestic alarm reports.  
remote radio user  
code  
A code used to arm and disarm a system from a remote location, using hand-held  
transmitters (in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1). Remote panic alarms are also allowed.  
sealed  
Refers to a zone’s status. If a zone is sealed, the detection devices are not violated and  
the zone indicator is not lit (that is, a reed switch is closed or a detector is on standby  
waiting for an intrusion).  
sensor watch  
A feature that allows the control panel to recognize when detection devices might have  
stopped working. Sensor watch monitors the operation of a zone over a programmed  
time period.  
silent alarm  
An alarm that sounds only at a remote location, and gives no obvious local indication  
that an alarm was sent out.  
STAY Mode 1  
STAY Mode 2  
A condition that automatically isolates certain zones when the security system is armed  
in this mode. Only the installer can program these zones.  
A condition that automatically isolates certain zones when the security system is armed  
in this mode. The Master Code holder can program these zones.  
telco arming  
sequence  
A feature that automatically diverts a telephone number to another telephone when a  
security system is armed in AWAY Mode, the same as using call forwarding.  
telco disarming  
sequence  
An automatic suspension of diverting of the telephone when the system is disarmed.  
unsealed  
Refers to a zone’s status. If a zone is unsealed, the detection devices are violated and  
the zone indicator is lit (that is, a reed switch is open or a detector noted an intrusion).  
user code  
zone  
A numeric code used to arm and disarm the system.  
A monitored input used to activate an alarm. A zone might be set up to activate an  
alarm only when the system is armed or to operate whether the system is armed or  
disarmed.  
80  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 20.0 Terminals and Descriptions  
20.3 Diagrams  
Figure 11: ICP-CC404 Wiring Diagram  
1 – 605 plug  
2 – 6 (Red) Telecom line (street)  
7 – Power to external equipment:  
12 V @ 400 mA  
8 – PIR  
9 – Zone 8  
10 – Zone 4  
11 – Zone 7  
12 – Zone 3  
13 – Piezo siren  
14 – Smoke detector  
15 – Strobe  
16 – Horn speaker  
17 – Codepad  
18 – Yellow  
19 – Green  
20 – Red  
21 – Black  
22 – Battery  
23 – 18 VAC 1.3 A plug pack  
(TF008)  
5 (Yellow) Internal phone line  
3 and 4 Not used  
2 (Black) Telecom line (street)  
1 (Green) Internal phone line  
3 – Zone 1  
4 – Zone 5  
5 – Zone 2  
6 – Zone 6  
24 – Link between +12 V and Comm  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 20.0 Terminals and Descriptions  
Figure 12: ICP-CC404 Component Overlay  
1 – Socket for telecom lead connect  
6 – Battery input  
2 – Termination for phone line  
OUT – internal phone line  
IN – telecom line (street)  
3 – Receiver interface connection  
4 – Zone termination strip  
7 – Plug pack input (Bosch TF008)  
8 – Relay contact select  
9 – Default switch  
10 – Programming key  
11 – Auxiliary Module: direct link cable  
5 – Output termination strip  
82  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 20.0 Terminals and Descriptions  
Figure 13: Telecom Connection Diagram for Australia  
5
2
3
2
3
4
1
6
9
7
10  
9
7
8
1 – Control panel  
2 – Red wire  
3 – Yellow wire  
8 – Telecom line  
9 – Black wire  
10 – 611 socket  
1 (green): internal phone line  
2 (black): telecom line (street)  
3 and 4: not connected  
5 (yellow): internal phone line  
6 (red): telecom line (street)  
4 – 6P4C plug (top view)  
5 – 605 plug  
6 – Internal phones  
7 – Green wire  
Figure 14: Telecom Connection Diagram for New Zealand  
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
8
7
1 – Control panel  
2 – Black wire  
3 – Red wire  
4 – RJ45 plug (top view)  
5 – Internal phones  
6 – Telecom line  
7 – (black): telecom line (street)  
(green): internal phone line  
(red): telecom line (street)  
(yellow): internal phone line  
8 – Green wire  
9 – Yellow wire  
Figure 15: Telecom Connection Diagram for China  
6
1
2
3
9
4
5
7
10  
8
1 – Control panel  
2 – Red wire  
3 – Black wire  
4 – 4P4C plug (top view)  
5 – RJ12 plug (top view)  
6 – Telecom line  
8 – Rear view of telephone plate  
(green): internal phone line  
(black): telecom line (street)  
(yellow): internal phone line  
(red): telecom line (street)  
9 – Yellow wire  
10 – Green wire  
7 – Internal phones  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 21.0 Specifications  
This equipment shall not be used in any manner  
that could constitute a nuisance to other telecom  
customers.  
Disconnect this equipment immediately if it  
becomes physically damaged and arrange for its  
disposal or repair.  
21.0 Specifications  
Table 66: Specifications  
0oC to +45oC  
Temperature Range  
(+32oF to +113oF)  
The transmit level from this device is set at a  
fixed level, so there might be circumstances  
where the performance is less than optimal.  
Before reporting such occurrences as faults,  
please check the line with a standard  
telepermitted telephone and do not report a fault  
if the telephone performance is satisfactory.  
This device is equipped with pulse dialing while  
the telecom standard is DTMF tone dialing.  
There is no guarantee that telecom lines will  
always continue to support pulse dialing.  
Use of dialing, when this equipment is connected  
to the same line as other equipment, can give rise  
to bell tinkle or noise and can also cause a false  
answer condition. If problems such as this occur,  
the user should not contact the Telecom Faults  
Service.  
10% to 95%  
Humidity  
TF008 Plug Pack –  
Power Source  
240 VAC/18 VAC @ 1.3 A  
65 mA  
Standby Current  
Current Draw In Alarm  
Current Draw In Alarm  
with Codepad  
115 mA  
105 mA  
6 Ah/12 VDC Rechargeable  
sealed lead acid battery  
Backup Battery  
30.6 cm x 26.2 cm x 8.4 cm  
(12.1 in. x 10.3 in. x 3.3 in.)  
Dimensions (case,  
packed in carton)  
2.5 kg (5.5 lb)  
N771  
PTC 211/98/085  
Weight  
Supplier Code  
New Zealand Telepermit  
The Austel permit issued for this product  
is subject to the following conditions:  
The ICP-CC404 Control Panel can only  
be powered by a Bosch Security  
Systems, Inc. TF008 Plug Pack (Approval  
Number Q92128).  
This equipment is set up to carry out test calls at  
pre-determined times. These test calls interrupt  
other calls that might be set up on the line at the  
same time. Discuss the timing set for these test  
calls with the installer.  
The timing set for test calls from this equipment  
may be subject to drift. If this proves to be  
inconvenient and your calls are interrupted,  
discuss the problem of timing with the equipment  
installer. Do not report the matter as a fault to  
Telecom Faults Service.  
This equipment shall not be set up to make  
automatic calls to the Telecom 111 Emergency  
Service.  
This equipment should not be used under any  
circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to  
other Telecom customers.  
In the event of any problem with this device,  
disconnect the system battery, AC mains supply,  
and the telephone line. The user must arrange  
with the supplier of the device for the necessary  
repairs.  
21.1 Warranty Statement  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. warrants this product to  
be free from defects in material and workmanship for  
a period of three years from the date of manufacture  
as indicated by the date stamp or the serial number  
on the product.  
Defective units returned by the purchaser at their  
own expense during this period will be repaired or  
replaced at the option of the manufacturer. The repair  
or replacement is free of charge provided that the  
defects were not incurred during shipping or  
handling, or the damage was not due to causes  
beyond the control of Bosch Security Systems, Inc.,  
such as lightning, excessive voltage, mechanical  
shock, or damage arising out of abuse, alteration, or  
improper application of the equipment.  
If the matter is reported to telecom as a wiring  
fault and the fault is proven to be due to this  
product, a call-out charge is incurred.  
21.2 Advice to Users  
The Austel permit issued for this product is subject to  
this condition:  
The ICP-CC404 Control Panel can only be powered  
by a TF008 Plug Pack (Approval Number Q92128).  
21.3 New Zealand Telepermit Notes  
The grant of a telepermit for a device does not  
indicate telecom acceptance of responsibility for  
the correct operation of the device under all  
operating conditions.  
84  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 22.0 Programming Sheets  
22.0 Programming Sheets  
Location  
Function  
Default/  
Options/Notes  
Programming Entry  
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0  
000 to 015  
0 = 10 and telephone termination = 0  
anywhere else 0 = 0  
Phone Number 1 - Receiver 1  
Refer to page 46  
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0  
016 to 031  
Phone Number 2 - Receiver 1  
0 = 10 and telephone termination = 0  
anywhere else 0 = 0  
Refer to page 47  
1
2
3
HI-LO handshake (contact ID)  
1400 Hz (Ademco TX @ 1900 Hz)  
2300 Hz (Sescoa TX @ 1800 Hz)  
4
5
No handshake  
Pager  
1
1
032  
Handshake Tone – Receiver 1  
Refer to page 47  
1
2
3
Contact ID  
4 + 2 express  
FSK 300 baud  
4
5
7
Domestic  
Basic pager  
Reserved  
033  
Transmission Format –  
Receiver 1  
Refer to page 47  
Right justified  
0 0 0 0 0 0  
034 to 039  
Subscriber ID Number – Receiver 1  
Refer to page 47  
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0  
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0  
040 to 055  
Phone Number 1 - Receiver 2  
0 = 10 and telephone termination = 0  
anywhere else 0 = 0  
Refer to page 46  
056 to 071  
Phone Number 2 - Receiver 2  
0 = 10 and telephone termination = 0  
anywhere else 0 = 0  
Refer to page 47  
1
2
3
HI-LO handshake (contact ID)  
1400 Hz (Ademco TX @ 1900 Hz)  
2300 Hz (Sescoa TX @ 1800 Hz)  
4
5
No handshake  
Pager  
1
1
072  
Handshake Tone – Receiver 2  
Refer to page 47  
1
2
3
Contact ID  
4 + 2 express  
FSK 300 baud  
4
5
7
Domestic  
Basic pager  
Reserved  
073  
Transmission Format –  
Receiver 2  
Refer to page 47  
Right justified  
0 0 0 0 0 0  
074 to 079  
Subscriber ID Number – Receiver 2  
Refer to page 47  
1
2
3
Australian DTMF  
Australian decadic  
Alternate DTMF and Australian  
4
5
6
International DTMF  
Reversed decadic  
Alternate DTMF and reversed decadic  
1
080  
Dialing Format  
Refer to page 48  
decadic  
081 to 112  
Reserved  
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0  
113 to 142  
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0  
Telco Arming Sequence (Call Forward On)  
Refer to page 48  
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0  
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0  
143 to 158  
Telco Disarm Sequence (Call Forward Off)  
Refer to page 48  
0 = 10 and telephone termination = 0  
anywhere else 0 = 0  
159 to 174  
Call Back Telephone Number  
Refer to page 49  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 22.0 Programming Sheets  
Location  
Function  
Default/  
Programming Entry  
Options/Notes  
Control panel does not answer  
0
175  
Ring Count  
Refer to page 49  
8
1 to 13 Number of rings until control panel answers  
14  
15  
1
2
4
Answering machine bypass 2  
Answering machine bypass 1  
Display FAULT indicator when telephone line fails  
Sound alarm when system arms  
0
176  
Telephone Line Fail Options  
Refer to page 49  
Sound alarm when system disarms  
Options 2 and 4 must be used with Option 1 (for example, program 1, 3, 5, or 7).  
1
2
4
8
1
2
4
8
1
2
4
8
1
2
4
8
Dialer reporting functions allowed  
9
177  
Remote arming by telephone allowed  
Answering machine bypass only when armed  
Bell 103 used for FSK format (Disabled = CCITT V21)  
Open/Close Reports only if previous alarm  
Open/Close Reports for STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2  
Delay siren until transmission complete  
Extend handshake wait time from 30 sec to 60 sec  
Set DTMF dialing pulses to 1 digit/sec  
Reserved  
Change decadic dialing to 60/40  
Reserved  
Upload/download allowed  
Call back phone number required for upload/download  
Exit from upload/download connection on alarm  
External modem module (CC811) required  
Dialer Options 1  
Refer to page 50  
0
178  
Dialer Options 2  
Refer to page 50  
179  
0
3
Dialer Options 3  
Refer to page 51  
180  
Alarm Link Options  
Refer to page 40  
1 2 3 4  
181 to 184  
Installer Code  
Refer to page 51  
86  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 22.0 Programming Sheets  
Location  
Function  
Default/  
Options/Notes  
Programming Entry  
The fifth location in each user code is the authority level:  
185 to 264  
User Codes  
Refer to page 51  
0
1
2
3
4
6
8
Arm/disarm  
Arm only  
Arm/disarm and open/close reports  
Arm only and close reports  
Arm/disarm and code required to isolate  
Arm/disarm and open/close reports and code required to isolate  
Master code and arm/disarm  
10 Master code and arm/disarm and open/close reports  
12 Master code and arm/disarm and code required to isolate  
14 Master code and arm/disarm and code required to isolate and open/close reports  
2 5 8 0 10  
15 15 15 15 2  
15 15 15 15 2  
15 15 15 15 2  
15 15 15 15 2  
15 15 15 15 2  
15 15 15 15 2  
15 15 15 15 2  
User #01 (185 to 189)  
RF User #09 (225 to 229)  
RF User #10 (230 to 234)  
RF User #11 (235 to 239)  
RF User #12 (240 to 244)  
RF User #13 (245 to 249)  
RF User #14 (250 to 254)  
RF User #15 (255 to 259)  
RF User #16 (260 to 264)  
15 15 15 15 2  
15 15 15 15 2  
15 15 15 15 2  
15 15 15 15 2  
15 15 15 15 2  
15 15 15 15 2  
15 15 15 15 2  
0
User #02 (190 to 194)  
User #03 (195 to 199)  
User #04 (200 to 204)  
User #05 (205 to 209)  
User #06 (210 to 214)  
User #07 (215 to 219)  
User #08 (220 to 224)  
0
15 15 15 3  
1
2
Zone 1  
Zone 2  
4
8
Zone 3  
Zone 4  
265  
Day Alarm Zones  
Refer to page 53  
0
1
2
3
No EOL  
1K  
1K5  
4
5
6
7
3K3  
8
9
6K8  
10K  
12 Reserved  
13 Reserved  
14 Reserved  
15 Split EOL (3K3/6K8) : Four  
burglary zones and four 24-hr zones  
15  
266  
3K9  
4K7  
5K6  
EOL Resistor Value  
Refer to page 53  
10 12K  
11 22K  
2K2  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 22.0 Programming Sheets  
Location  
Function  
Default/  
Programming Entry  
Options/Notes  
267 to 322  
Zone Definitions  
Refer to page 54  
2 0 0 1 14 1 1  
(Delay 1)  
12 0 0 1 12 1 1  
(Fixed 24-hr burglary)  
Zone #01  
Zone #05  
(267 to 273)  
(295 to 301)  
1 0 0 1 14 1 1  
(Handover)  
12 0 0 1 12 1 1  
(Fixed 24-hr burglary)  
Zone #02  
(274 to 280)  
Zone #06  
(302 to 308)  
1 0 0 1 14 1 1  
(Handover)  
13 0 0 1 12 1 1  
(Fixed 24-hr fire)  
Zone #03  
(281 to 287)  
Zone #07  
(309 to 315)  
0 0 0 1 14 1 1  
(Instant)  
9 0 0 1 12 1 1  
(Fixed Tamper)  
Zone #04  
(288 to 294)  
Zone #08  
(316 to 322)  
The first location (from the left) of the zone definition is the Zone Type. The options are:  
0
1
2
3
Instant  
4
5
6
7
Reserved  
Reserved  
24-hour medical  
24-hour panic  
8
9
24-hour hold-up  
24-hour tamper  
12 24-hour burglary  
13 24-hour fire  
14 Chime  
Handover  
Delay 1  
Delay 2  
10 Reserved  
11 Keyswitch  
15 Not used  
The second location of the zone definition is the Zone Pulse Count. Use the pulse count to program the  
number of pulses (0 to 15) that must register within the pulse count time to activate an alarm.  
The third location (from the left) of the zone definition is the Zone Pulse Count Time. The options are:  
20 ms Loop Response Time:  
150 ms Loop Response Time:  
0
1
2
3
0.5 sec  
1 sec  
2 sec  
3 sec  
4
5
6
7
4 sec  
5 sec  
10 sec  
15 sec  
8
9
20 sec  
30 sec  
12 60 sec  
13 90 sec  
14 120 sec  
15 200 sec  
10 40 sec  
11 50 sec  
The fourth location of the zone definition is the Zone Options 1 parameter. The options are:  
1
2
Lockout siren/dialer  
Delay Alarm Report  
4
8
Silent alarm  
Sensor watch  
The fifth location of the zone definition is the Zone Options 2 parameter. The options are:  
1
2
Isolated in STAY Mode 1  
Zone isolation allowed  
4
8
Forced arming allowed  
Zone Restore Report allowed  
The sixth location of the zone definition is the Report Code. The options are:  
0
1
Do not send Zone Alarm Reports  
Send Zone Alarm Reports  
The seventh location of the zone definition is the Zone Dialer Options parameter. The options are:  
0
1
2
No Zone Reports allowed  
Report to Receiver 1  
Report to Receiver 2  
4
8
Report to both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2  
Report to Receiver 2 only if Receiver 1  
fails  
The keyswitch zone options replace Zone Options 1 for zones programmed to operate as keyswitch  
zones (Zone Type = 11). The options are:  
0
1
2
Latching arm and disarm in AWAY Mode  
Latching arm in AWAY Mode  
Latching disarm from AWAY Mode or  
STAY Mode  
Latching arm and disarm in STAY Mode  
Latching arm in STAY Mode  
8
Momentary arm and disarm in AWAY  
Mode  
Momentary arm In AWAY Mode  
9
10 Momentary disarm from AWAY Mode or  
STAY Mode  
4
5
6
12 Momentary arm and disarm in STAY Mode  
13 Momentary arm in STAY Mode  
14 Momentary disarm from STAY Mode  
Latching disarm from STAY Mode  
88  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 22.0 Programming Sheets  
Location  
Function  
Default/  
Options/Notes  
Programming Entry  
1 to 15 Number of times siren operates until lockout  
323  
3
Swinger Shutdown Count for Siren  
Refer to page 59  
1 to 15 Number of times dialer operates until lockout  
324  
6
Swinger Shutdown Count for Dialer  
Refer to page 59  
325 Zone Bypass Report  
326 Zone Bypass Restore Report  
Refer to page 60  
9 8  
2 3  
4 5  
14  
327 Zone Trouble Report  
328 Zone Trouble Restore Report  
Refer to page 60  
329 Sensor Watch Report  
330 Sensor Watch Restore Report  
Refer to page 60  
331  
Zone Alarm Restore Code  
Refer to page 60  
0
1
2
4
8
No Zone Status Reports allowed  
Report to Receiver 1  
Report to Receiver 2  
Report to both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2  
Report to Receiver 2 only if Receiver 1 fails  
1
332  
Zone Status Reporting Options  
Refer to page 61  
11 12  
1
333 Open Report  
334 Close Report  
Refer to page 61  
0
1
2
4
8
No Open/Close Reports allowed  
Report to Receiver 1  
Report to Receiver 2  
Report to both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2  
Report to Receiver 2 only if Receiver 1 fails  
335  
Open/Close Reporting Options  
Refer to page 61  
6
7 15  
7 14  
7 13  
1
336  
Codepad Duress Report  
Refer to page 61  
Location 337: tens digit  
Location 338: units digit  
337 to 338  
Codepad Panic Report  
=890-Refer to page 61  
Location 339: tens digit  
Location 340: units digit  
339 to 340  
Codepad Fire Report  
Refer to page 61  
Location 341: tens digit  
Location 342: units digit  
341 to 342  
Codepad Medical Report  
Refer to page 62  
0
1
2
4
8
No Codepad Alarm Reports allowed  
Report to Receiver 1  
Report to Receiver 2  
Report to both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2  
Report to Receiver 2 only if Receiver 1 fails  
343  
Codepad Reporting Options  
Refer to page 62  
Location 344: tens digit  
Location 345: units digit  
10 3  
10 8  
344 to 345  
System Status – AUX Power Supply Fail Report  
Refer to page 62  
Location 346: tens digit  
Location 347: units digit  
346 to 347  
System Status – AUX Power Supply Fail Restore  
Report  
Refer to page 62  
Location 348: tens digit  
Location 349: units digit  
10 2  
348 to 349  
System Status – AC Fail Report  
Refer to page 62  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 22.0 Programming Sheets  
Location  
Function  
Default/  
Programming Entry  
Options/Notes  
Location 350: tens digit  
Location 351: units digit  
350 to 351  
System Status – AC Fail Restore Report  
Refer to page 62  
10 7  
10 1  
10 6  
6 7 12  
1
Location 352: tens digit  
Location 353: units digit  
352 to 353  
System Status – Low Battery Report  
Refer to page 62  
Location 354: tens digit  
Location 355: units digit  
354 to 355  
System Status – Low Battery Restore Report  
Refer to page 63  
Location 356: Code retry limit (0 = unlimited)  
Location 357: tens digit  
356 to 358  
System Status – Access Denied (Code Retry)  
Refer to page 63  
Location 358: units digit  
0
1
2
4
8
No System Status Reports allowed  
Report to Receiver 1  
Report to Receiver 2  
359  
System Status Reporting Options  
Refer to page 63  
Report to both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2  
Report to Receiver 2 only if Receiver 1 fails  
Location 360: Hour of day (tens digit)  
Location 361: Hour of day (units digit)  
Location 362: Minute of day (tens digit)  
Location 363: Minute of day (units digit)  
Location 364: Test Report (tens digit)  
Location 365: Test Report (units digit)  
Location 366: Repeat interval in days  
No Test Reports allowed  
0 0 0 0 7 1 0  
360 to 366  
Test Report Time (Automatic)  
Refer to page 63  
0
1
2
4
8
1
367  
Report to Receiver 1  
Report to Receiver 2  
Report to both Receiver 1 and Receiver 2  
Report to Receiver 2 only if Receiver 1 fails  
Test Reporting Dialer Options  
Refer to page 64  
1
14  
0
0
0
0
1
0
15  
1
0
0
0
368 to 397  
Outputs  
Refer to page 64  
Output 1  
(368 to 373)  
(Horn speaker)  
Relay Output  
(386 to 391)  
(Sirens running)  
2
7
10  
2
1
3
13  
2
1
0
1
Output 2  
(374 to 379)  
(Fire alarm with verification) Codepad Buzzer  
(392 to 397)  
(Entry/exit plus day alarm)  
6
0
6
4
0
8
Strobe Output  
(380 to 385)  
(Strobe – reset after 8 hr)  
The first two locations (from the left) of the output definition provide the Event Code. For a complete list  
of the Output Event Codes, refer to Section 16.2 Output Event Types on page 65.  
The third location of the output definition is the output polarity. The options are:  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Disabled  
Normally open, going low  
8
9
Normally low, going open  
Normally low, pulsing open  
Normally open, pulsing low  
Normally open, one shot low  
Normally open, one shot low (can restart)  
Normally open, one shot low (can reset)  
Normally open, one shot low (alarm)  
Normally open, latching low  
10 Normally low, one shot open  
11 Normally low, one shot open (can restart)  
12 Normally low, one shot open (can reset)  
13 Normally low, one shot open (alarm)  
14 Normally low, latching open  
The fourth location of the output definition is the time base. The options are:  
1
2
200 ms  
1 sec  
3
4
1 min  
1 hr  
90  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 22.0 Programming Sheets  
Location  
Function  
Default/  
Programming Entry  
Options/Notes  
The fifth and sixth locations of the output definition provide the time base multiplier. Enter a value between  
01 and 99.  
368 to 397  
Outputs  
(continued)  
One Shot Mode  
When you program the output polarity as one shot, the time base is multiplied by the time base multiplier.  
For example, if the time base = 2 and the multiplier = 05, the output operates for 5 sec.  
Pulsing Mode  
When you program the output polarity as pulsing, the time base becomes the ON time and the multiplier  
becomes the OFF time. The OFF time is the time base, which is multiplied by the multiplier. For example,  
if you want the output to pulse 1 sec ON and 5 sec OFF, you would program time base as 2 and the  
multiplier as 5.  
Location 398: increments of 1 sec (0 to 15 sec)  
Location 399: increments of 16 sec (0 to 240 sec)  
398 to 399  
Entry Time 1  
Refer to page 70  
4 1  
8 2  
12 3  
0 0  
0 0  
0 0  
0
Location 400: increments of 1 sec (0 to 15 sec)  
Location 401: increments of 16 sec (0 to 240 sec)  
400 to 401  
Entry Time 2  
Refer to page 71  
Location 402: increments of 1 sec (0 to 15 sec)  
Location 403: increments of 16 sec (0 to 240 sec)  
402 to 403  
Exit Time (AWAY/STAY Modes)  
Refer to page 71  
Location 404: increments of 1 sec (0 to 15 sec)  
Location 405: increments of 16 sec (0 to 240 sec)  
404 to 405  
Entry Guard Time for STAY Mode  
Refer to page 71  
Location 406: increments of 1 sec (0 to 15 sec)  
Location 407: increments of 16 sec (0 to 240 sec)  
406 to 407  
Delay Alarm Report Time  
Refer to page 71  
Location 408: increments of days (tens digit)  
Location 409: increments of days (units digit)  
408 to 409  
Sensor Watch Time  
Refer to page 71  
0
No lockout  
410  
1 to 15 Increments of 10 sec (10 sec to 150 sec)  
Codepad Lockout Time  
Refer to page 71  
0
No siren time  
5
411  
1 to 15 Increments of 1 min (1 min to 15 min)  
Siren Run Time  
Refer to page 71  
0 to 15 (slowest to fastest frequency)  
7
412  
Siren Sound Rate  
Refer to page 71  
0
No pre-alert time  
1
413  
1 to 15 Increments of 5 min (5 min to 75 min)  
Auto Arming Pre-Alert Time  
Refer to page 71  
Location 414: Hour of day (tens digit)  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
414 to 417  
Auto Arming Time  
Refer to page 72  
Location 415: Hour of day (units digit)  
Location 416: Minute of day (tens digit)  
Location 417: Minute of day (units digit)  
Location 418: Hour of day (tens digit)  
418 to 421  
Auto Disarming Time  
Refer to page 72  
Location 419: Hour of day (units digit)  
Location 420: Minute of day (tens digit)  
Location 421: Minute of day (units digit)  
0 to 15 Increments of 500 ms (500 ms to 8 sec)  
422  
Kiss-Off Wait Time  
Refer to page 72  
0
1
423  
Reserved  
1
2
4
8
Bosch smart lockout allowed  
Horn speaker monitor  
Strobe indication for radio arm/disarm  
Horn speaker beeps for radio arm/disarm  
424  
System Options 1  
Refer to page 73  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | 22.0 Programming Sheets  
Location  
Function  
Default/  
Programming Entry  
Options/Notes  
1
2
4
8
1
2
4
8
1
2
4
8
1
2
4
8
1
2
4
8
1
2
4
8
1
2
3
4
Codepad panic to be silent  
Codepad fire to be silent  
Codepad medical to be silent  
425  
0
8
0
0
2
System Options 2  
Refer to page 73  
Access denied (code retries) to be silent  
AC fail after 1 hr (disabled = after 2 min)  
Ignore AC fail  
Pulse count handover allowed  
Handover delay to be sequential  
Control panel to power up disarmed (if power reset)  
Arm/disarm tracking on power up  
Internal crystal to keep time  
Night arm station, or RE005E installed  
Test reports only when armed  
Test report after siren reset  
Auto arm in STAY Mode 1  
STAY indicator to display day alarm status  
426  
System Options 3  
Refer to page 74  
427  
System Options 4  
Refer to page 74  
428  
Consumer Options 1  
Refer to page 75  
Codepad display extinguish after 60 sec  
429  
Single button arming allowed (AWAY/STAY Modes 1 and 2)  
Single button disarming allowed (STAY Modes 1 and 2)  
Alarm memory reset on disarm  
Consumer Options 2  
Refer to page 75  
Codepad fault beeps allowed  
5
0
430  
Use digit 3 for codepad duress alarm (instead of digit 9)  
Alarms activate sirens and strobe outputs in STAY Modes 1 and 2  
Reserved  
Radio receiver (WE800E)  
Latching keyswitch input  
Consumer Options 3  
Refer to page 75  
431  
Radio Input Options  
Refer to page 76  
Momentary keyswitch input  
Reserved  
466 to 513  
Domestic Telephone Numbers  
Refer to page 41  
748 to 749  
Reserved  
Location 750: Country Code (tens digit)  
Location 751: Country Code (units digit)  
0 2  
0
750 to 781  
Country Codes  
Refer to page 93  
0
Defaulting system allowed  
900  
15 Defaulting system disabled  
Default Options  
Refer to page 15  
Location 901: Hour of day (tens digit)  
0
0
0
0
901 to 904  
Location 902: Hour of day (units digit)  
Location 903: Minute of day (tens digit)  
Location 904: Minute of day (units digit)  
System Time  
Refer to page 72  
Location 905: Day of the month (tens digit)  
905 to 910  
Location 906: Day of the month (units digit)  
Location 907: Month of the year (tens digit)  
Location 908: Month of the year (units digit)  
Location 909: Current year (tens digit)  
Location 910: Current year (units digit)  
0 1 0 1 0 1  
System Date  
Refer to page 72  
92  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | Contents  
22.1 Country Codes  
The PSTN provides a programmable line interface to meet international telephone line requirements. This  
program meets various country PTT standards.  
Country  
Code  
Country  
Code Country  
Code  
Country  
Code Country  
Code  
Argentina  
0 1  
Poland  
4 1  
Liechtenstein  
6 3  
Gabon  
6 5  
Papua New  
Guinea  
6 5  
Australia  
Austria  
0 2  
0 3  
0 4  
Portugal  
Romania  
4 2  
4 3  
4 4  
Gambia  
Ghana  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
Paraguay  
Rwanda  
St. Lucia  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
Afghanistan  
Albania  
6 5  
6 5  
Belgium  
Russian  
Federation  
Brazil  
0 5  
0 6  
Saudi  
Arabia  
4 5  
4 6  
Andorra  
Angola  
6 5  
6 5  
Grenada  
6 5  
6 5  
Samoa  
Eastern  
6 5  
6 5  
Bulgaria  
Serbia and  
Guatemala  
San Marino  
Montenegro  
Canada  
0 7  
Singapore  
4 7  
Antigua and  
Barbuda  
6 5  
Guinea  
6 5  
Sao Tome  
and Principe  
6 5  
China  
0 8  
0 9  
1 0  
1 1  
1 2  
Slovakia  
Slovenia  
4 8  
4 9  
Azerbaijan  
Bahamas  
Bangladesh  
Barbados  
Belize  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
Guyana  
Haiti  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
Saint Vincent 6 5  
Colombia  
Croatia  
Cyprus  
Senegal  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
South Africa 5 0  
Vatican  
Honduras  
Iran  
Seychelles  
Sierra Leone  
Solomon Is  
Spain  
5 1  
5 2  
Czech  
Sweden  
Republic  
Denmark  
Egypt  
1 3  
1 4  
Switzerland  
5 3  
5 4  
Benin  
6 5  
6 5  
Iraq  
6 5  
6 5  
Somali  
6 5  
6 5  
Taiwan,  
China  
Bhutan  
Ivory Coast  
Sri Lanka  
Estonia  
Finland  
France  
1 5  
1 6  
1 7  
Thailand  
Turkey  
5 5  
5 6  
5 7  
Bolivia  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
Jamaica  
Kenya  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
Sudan  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
Suriname  
Swaziland  
United  
Kingdom  
Botswana  
Brunei  
Kiribati  
Germany  
Greece  
1 8  
1 9  
2 0  
United  
States  
5 8  
5 9  
6 0  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
Kuwait  
Laos  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
Tajikistan  
Tanzania  
Togo  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
Venezuela  
Burkina-faso  
Burma  
Hong Kong,  
PRC  
Vietnam  
Lesotho  
Hungary  
India  
2 1  
2 2  
2 3  
Burundi  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
Liberia  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
Tuvalu  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
Armenia  
Belarus  
6 2  
6 2  
Cambodia  
Cameroon  
Libya  
Uganda  
Indonesia  
Madagascar  
United Arab  
Emirates  
Ireland  
Italy  
2 4  
2 5  
Georgia  
Jordan  
6 2  
6 2  
Cape Verde  
6 5  
Malawi  
6 5  
6 5  
Uruguay  
6 5  
6 5  
Central African 6 5  
Republic  
Maldives  
Uzbekistan  
Japan  
2 6  
2 7  
Kazakhstan  
Kyrgyzstan  
6 2  
6 2  
Chad  
Chile  
6 5  
6 5  
Mali  
6 5  
6 5  
Vanuatu  
6 5  
Korea, South  
Marshall  
Islands  
Latvia  
2 8  
2 9  
3 0  
3 1  
3 2  
3 3  
Moldova  
Oman  
6 2  
6 2  
6 2  
6 2  
6 2  
6 2  
Comoros  
Congo  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
Mauritania  
Mauritius  
Micronesia  
Monaco  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
Lithuania  
Luxembourg  
Macedonia  
Malaysia  
Malta  
Pakistan  
Qatar  
Costa Rica  
Cuba  
Syria  
Djibouti  
Mongolia  
Ukraine  
Dominica Rep. 6 5  
Mozambique 6 5  
Mexico  
3 4  
3 5  
East Timor  
Ecuador  
6 5  
6 5  
Namibia  
Nauru  
6 5  
6 5  
Netherlands  
Algeria  
6 3  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | Contents  
Country  
Code  
Country  
Code Country  
Code  
Country  
Code Country  
Code  
New Zealand 3 6  
Bahrain  
6 3  
El Salvador  
6 5  
Nepal  
6 5  
Nigeria  
3 7  
French  
Polynesia  
6 3  
Equatorial Gui  
nea  
6 5  
Nicaragua  
6 5  
Norway  
Peru  
3 8  
3 9  
4 0  
Iceland  
Israel  
6 3  
6 3  
6 3  
Eritrea  
Ethiopia  
Fiji  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
Niger  
6 5  
6 5  
6 5  
Palau  
Philippines  
Lebanon  
Panama  
94  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | Index  
Index  
2-Channel Hand Held Transmitter Operations  
Arming In AWAY Mode..............................................25  
Arming In STAY Mode 1.............................................25  
Disarming From AWAY Mode....................................25  
Disarming From STAY Mode 1...................................26  
4-Channel Hand Held Transmitter Operations  
Arming In AWAY Mode..............................................26  
Arming In STAY Mode 1.............................................26  
Disarming From AWAY Mode....................................26  
Disarming From STAY Mode 1...................................26  
Turning Remote Output 1 Off .....................................27  
Turning Remote Output 1 On......................................27  
Turning Remote Output 2 Off .....................................27  
Turning Remote Output 2 On......................................27  
AC Mains  
Zone Indicators ...............................................................17  
Zone Isolating Mode ......................................................18  
Codepad Medical......................................................... 21, 73  
Codepad Medical To Be Silent .........................................73  
Codepad Panic.............................................................. 21, 72  
Codepad Panic To Be Silent..............................................72  
Command 958 - Enable/Disable Zone Status.................11  
Command 959 - Test Programming Key.........................11  
Command 960 - Exit Installer's Programming Mode ....12  
Command 961 - Reset Control Panel Back To Factory  
Default..............................................................................12  
Command 965 - Set Up Domestic Dialing......................13  
Command 966 - Enable/Disable Automatic Stepping...13  
Command 999 - Display Panel Type/Software Version14  
Communication Failure......................................................23  
Consumer Options 1  
Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1.........................................74  
Enable STAY Indicator To Display Day Alarm Status  
......................................................................................74  
Send Test Reports Only If Armed ...............................74  
Control Panel To Power Up Disarmed............................73  
CP5 Eight Zone Codepad..................................................76  
Date and Time.....................................................................36  
Day Alarm  
Fail In 1 Hour .................................................................73  
Ignore Fail Indication ....................................................73  
AC Mains Failure................................................................24  
Access Codes  
Installer Code..................................................................50  
User Codes......................................................................50  
Access Denied To Be Silent ..............................................73  
Adding User Codes ............................................................35  
Alarm Link  
Direct Connect................................................................40  
Enable Alarm Link Call Back.......................................40  
Initiate Modem Call.......................................................38  
Remote Connect With Call Back Verification...........39  
Remote Connect With Customer Control..................39  
Remote Connect Without Call Back Verification .....39  
Terminate Session If Report Pending..........................40  
Alarm Link Software ..........................................................76  
Answering Machine Bypass...............................................48  
Arming  
In AWAY Mode.............................................................18  
In STAY Mode 1......................................................19, 37  
In STAY Mode 2......................................................20, 37  
Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1 .............................................74  
Automatic Stepping Of Locations ....................................13  
AWAY Indicator...........................................................16, 17  
AWAY Mode  
Operation.........................................................................52  
Status Indicator................................................................74  
Turning On/Off ..............................................................38  
Defaulting The Control Panel............................................12  
Dialer Information  
Answering Machine Bypass...........................................48  
Call Back Telephone Number ......................................48  
Dialing Format ................................................................47  
Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 1 ..............45  
Programming Telephone Numbers..............................45  
Subscriber ID Number For Receiver 1........................46  
Telco Arming Sequence.................................................47  
Telephone Line Fault Options............................... 48, 72  
Disarming  
Automatic.........................................................................71  
From AWAY Mode........................................................18  
Domestic Dialing  
Arming.............................................................................18  
Disarming ........................................................................18  
Bell Test................................................................................37  
Bypass Reports....................................................................59  
Call Back Telephone Number ..........................................48  
Changing User Codes ........................................................35  
Codepad Duress..................................................................21  
Codepad Fire.................................................................21, 73  
Codepad Fire To Be Silent................................................73  
Codepad Indicators  
Command 965.................................................................13  
Disable.................................................................30, 35, 36  
Format ..............................................................................40  
Function ...........................................................................40  
Duress Alarm.......................................................................21  
EDM Smart Watch..............................................................72  
EDMSAT..............................................................................64  
Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode........................ 19, 20  
Exit Installer's Programming Mode..................................12  
Fault  
AWAY.............................................................................16  
AWAY Indicator............................................................17  
FAULT.............................................................................16  
FAULT Indicator............................................................18  
MAINS.............................................................................16  
MAINS Indicator......................................................17, 18  
Off Indicator....................................................................18  
On Indicator....................................................................18  
STAY ...............................................................................16  
STAY Indicator ..............................................................17  
System Disarmed............................................................17  
AC Mains Failure............................................................24  
Communication Failure .................................................23  
Low Battery .....................................................................22  
Sensor Watch...................................................................23  
Fault Analysis Mode ...........................................................22  
Exit....................................................................................38  
FAULT Indicator.......................................................... 16, 18  
Features  
Solution 404.......................................................................7  
Fire Alarm ............................................................................21  
Forced Arming........................................................18, 19, 20  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | Index  
Handover .............................................................................54  
Hold Down Function  
Codepad Panic Alarm....................................................65  
Codepad Tamper............................................................66  
Communications Failure................................................67  
Communications Failure After 3 Unsuccessful Calls.67  
Day Alarm Enabled........................................................65  
Day Alarm Latching.......................................................65  
Day Alarm Resetting......................................................65  
Dialer Active....................................................................67  
Dialer Disabled................................................................67  
EDMSAT - Satellite Siren..............................................64  
Entry Warning.................................................................64  
Entry Warning + Day Alarm Resetting.......................64  
Exit Warning ...................................................................64  
Exit Warning Finished ...................................................64  
Exit Warning With All Zones Sealed Or Entry  
Arm In STAY Mode 1...................................................37  
Arm In STAY Mode 2...................................................37  
Bell Test...........................................................................37  
Initiate Modem Call.......................................................38  
Reset Latching Outputs .................................................38  
Send Test Report............................................................38  
Strobe Test.......................................................................37  
Turning Day Alarm On/Off.........................................38  
Installer Code......................................................................50  
Installer Code Function  
Change Telco Arm/Disarm Sequence...................28, 34  
Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones..................................30, 35  
Telephone Monitor Mode.............................................30  
Installer's Programming Commands  
Warning.......................................................................64  
Fire Alarm Latching .......................................................66  
Fire Alarm Resetting ......................................................66  
Fire Alarm Verification..................................................66  
Global Chime..................................................................67  
Horn Speaker ..................................................................66  
Horn Speaker Monitor Fail ...........................................65  
Kiss-Off After Exit Time................................................64  
Kiss-Off Received ...........................................................65  
Low Battery .....................................................................65  
Mimic System Fault........................................................66  
Mimic Zone 1..................................................................67  
Mimic Zone 2..................................................................67  
Mimic Zone 3..................................................................67  
Mimic Zone 4..................................................................67  
Mimic Zone 6..................................................................67  
Mimic Zone 7..................................................................67  
Mimic Zone 8..................................................................67  
Radio Control Output 1.................................................67  
Radio Control Output 1 - Not In AWAY Mode........67  
Radio Control Output 2.................................................67  
Radio Control Output 2 - Not In AWAY Mode........67  
Remote Control 1...........................................................66  
Remote Control 2...........................................................66  
Remote Control 3...........................................................66  
Ring Detect......................................................................67  
Sensor Watch Alarm ......................................................65  
Silent Alarm.....................................................................66  
Sirens Running................................................................66  
Strobe Operating.............................................................66  
System Armed.................................................................64  
System Disarmed ............................................................64  
Telephone Line Fail........................................................65  
Zone Not Sealed..............................................................67  
Zone Not Sealed After Exit Time.................................67  
958 - Enable/Disable Zone Status................................11  
959 - Test Programming Key........................................11  
960 - Exit Installer's Programming Mode ...................12  
961 - Reset Control Panel Back To Factory Default .12  
965 - Set Up Domestic Dialing.....................................13  
966 - Automatic Stepping Of Locations......................13  
999 - Display Panel Type/Software Version Number14  
Introduction...........................................................................7  
Invalid Code........................................................................73  
Isolate In STAY Mode 1....................................................57  
Isolating Allowed ................................................................57  
Isolating Zones ....................................................................21  
Latching Outputs  
Resetting ..........................................................................38  
Lockout Dialer.....................................................................56  
Lockout Siren ......................................................................56  
Low Battery..........................................................................22  
MAINS Indicator................................................... 16, 17, 18  
Master Code Function  
Changing & Deleting User Codes................................32  
Setting Date and Time...................................................36  
Turning Outputs ON/OFF............................................36  
Walk Test Mode.............................................................36  
Medical Alarm.....................................................................21  
Modem Call.........................................................................38  
New Zealand Telepermit Notes........................................83  
Night Arm Station...............................................................76  
Off Indicator........................................................................18  
On Indicator........................................................................18  
Option Bits...........................................10, 40, 49, 52, 56, 57  
Optional Equipment  
2-Channel Radio Interface............................................75  
8 Zone LED Codepad ...................................................76  
Night Arm Station..........................................................76  
Programming Key ..........................................................76  
PS100 Power Supply......................................................76  
TF008 Plug Pack.............................................................76  
Output Event Type  
Outputs  
One Shot Polarities.........................................................69  
Pulsing Polarities .............................................................69  
Redirecting Output To Codepad Buzzer.....................64  
Turning On/Off ..............................................................36  
Panic Alarm..........................................................................21  
Power Up Disarmed............................................................73  
Primary Telephone Number For Receiver 1...................45  
Programming .........................................................................9  
Automatic Stepping Of Locations ................................13  
Entry/Exit Tiemrs...........................................................69  
Option Bits.......................................10, 40, 49, 52, 56, 57  
Via Programming Key ...................................................10  
Via Remote Codepad.......................................................9  
Programming Key........................................................ 10, 76  
AC Fail.............................................................................65  
AC Mains 60 Hz or 50 Hz............................................67  
Alarm When In AWAY Mode.....................................66  
Alarm When In STAY Mode.......................................66  
Armed In AWAY Mode ...............................................64  
Armed In STAY Mode..................................................64  
Auto Arm Pre-Alert Time.............................................64  
AUX Power Supply Fail................................................65  
Codepad Duress Alarm.................................................66  
Codepad Fire Alarm......................................................65  
Codepad Medical Alarm...............................................65  
96  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ICP-CC404 | Installation Guide | Index  
Test...................................................................................11  
PS100 Power Supply Module............................................76  
Quick Start.............................................................................7  
Receiver 1  
Primary Telephone Number.........................................45  
Subscriber ID Number ..................................................46  
Remote Radio Transmitter Codes  
Deleting Transmitter Codes..........................................33  
Remote Radio Transmitter Operations............................24  
Add or Changing Transmitter Codes..........................25  
Arming In AWAY Mode........................................25, 26  
Arming In STAY Mode 1.......................................25, 26  
Deleting Transmitter Codes..........................................25  
Disarming From STAY Mode 1...................................26  
Disarming In AWAY Mode ...................................25, 26  
Operating Outputs .........................................................27  
Remote Radio User Codes  
Adding Or Changing...............................................25, 32  
Deleting......................................................................25, 33  
Reporting Format  
Domestic Dialing............................................................40  
Reset Control Panel Back To Factory Default................12  
Sensor Watch.................................................................23, 56  
Smart Watch........................................................................72  
STAY Indicator.............................................................16, 17  
STAY Indicator To Display Day Alarm Status ..............74  
STAY Mode 1  
Pulse Count......................................................................55  
Pulse Count Handover...................................................55  
Restore Code...................................................................59  
Restore Report ................................................................58  
Status Mode.....................................................................11  
Trouble.............................................................................59  
Zone Bypass.........................................................................59  
Zone Indicators....................................................................17  
Zone Options 1  
Lockout Siren & Dialer ..................................................56  
Sensor Watch...................................................................56  
Zone Options 2  
Isolate In STAY Mode 1................................................57  
Zone Isolation Allowed..................................................57  
Zone Restore Report......................................................58  
Zone Reporting Information  
Zone Restore Code.........................................................59  
Zone Types  
Chime Zone.....................................................................55  
Delay-1 Zone...................................................................54  
Delay-2 Zone...................................................................54  
Handover Zone...............................................................54  
Instant Zone.....................................................................54  
Arming.......................................................................19, 37  
STAY Mode 2  
Arming.......................................................................20, 37  
Setting Zones.............................................................30, 35  
Strobe Test...........................................................................37  
System Disarmed ................................................................17  
System Operations  
Arming In AWAY Mode..............................................18  
Arming In STAY Mode 1.............................................19  
Arming In STAY Mode 2.............................................20  
Disarming From AWAY Mode....................................18  
System Options 1  
EDM Smart Lockout......................................................72  
System Options 2  
Access Denied To Be Silent..........................................73  
Codepad Fire To Be Silent............................................73  
Codepad Medical To Be Silent ....................................73  
Codepad Panic To Be Silent.........................................72  
System Options 3  
AC Fail In 1 Hour..........................................................73  
Ignore AC Mains Fail Indication .................................73  
System Options 4  
Enable Control Panel To Power Up Disarmed..........73  
Telco Arming Sequence........................................ 28, 34, 47  
Telephone Monitor Mode .................................................30  
Test Reports.........................................................................38  
Only When Armed ........................................................74  
TF008 Plug Pack .................................................................76  
Trouble Reports ..................................................................59  
User Codes...........................................................................50  
Adding Or Changing.....................................................32  
Deleting......................................................................32, 33  
Walk Test Mode..................................................................36  
Warranty Statement............................................................83  
Zone  
EOL Resistor Value.......................................................52  
Isolating Allowed............................................................57  
Options 1.........................................................................53  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc. | 12/08 | F01U089401-02  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Bosch Security Systems, Inc.  
130 Perinton Parkway  
Fairport, NY 14450-9199 USA  
© 2008 Bosch Security Systems, Inc.  
F01U089401-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Bionaire Fan B298 User Manual
Black Decker Battery Charger 724308 User Manual
Boca Research Network Card M73 APO01 810 User Manual
Broilmaster Gas Grill AND P48 User Manual
Canon Calculator LS 270G User Manual
Casio Digital Camera EX M20 User Manual
Casio Projector XJ 360 User Manual
Casio Projector XJ S31 User Manual
Casio Watch 1918 User Manual
Christie Digital Systems Projector Mirage Series User Manual